Sunteți pe pagina 1din 214

SITRAS® DPU96

Digital Protective Unit and Controller (Version 2)


Operating Instructions Version 2.13

Siemens AG
Transportation Systems Group
Railway Electrification M o b i l i t y for a moving world
Order-No.: A52811-C4302-D11-A3-7619 Siemens Transportation Systems
Copyright  Siemens AG 1998. All rights reserved.
The manufacturer of this product
Siemens AG
Transportation Systems Group
Railway Electrification
has introduced and implements a quality
management system in accordance with
DIN EN ISO 9001
Quality management systems
Model for quality assurance /
QM explanation in design, development, pro-
duction, installation and maintenance.
Certification was initially issued in 1994 by
the DQS (Deutsche Gesellschaft zur Zertifi-
zierung von Managementsystemen mbH).

If you require additional copies of these in-


stallation instructions, please order from the
responsible Siemens sales office, stating the
title and the following order number.
Order–No.: A52811-C4302-D11-A3-7619

Issued by:
Siemens AG
Transportation Systems Group NOTICE
Railway Electrification The reproduction, transmission or
use of this document or its con-
P.O. Box 3240
tents is not permitted without ex-
D-91050 Erlangen
press written authority. Offenders
will be liable for damages. All
rights, including rights created by
Subject to change without notice! patent grant or registration of a
 Siemens AG 1998 utility model or design, are re-
served.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 2 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Contents

Contents
Contents ......................................................................................................................................... 3

1 General......................................................................................................................................... 7
1.1 Important information ........................................................................................................ 7
1.2 Structure of the operating instructions............................................................................... 8
1.3 Explanation of the types of representation used.............................................................. 10
1.4 Errors, problems, requirements ....................................................................................... 10

2 Safety ......................................................................................................................................... 11
2.1 Proper use ....................................................................................................................... 11
2.2 Personnel qualifications ................................................................................................... 11
2.3 Explanations about warning notes ................................................................................... 12
2.4 Safety requirements ........................................................................................................ 13
2.5 Electrical hazard sources ................................................................................................. 13

3 Purpose and use......................................................................................................................... 15


3.1 Section feeder protection in the rectifier substation ........................................................ 15
3.1.1 Requirements on the section feeder protection 15
3.1.2 Protective function 15
3.2 SITRAS® DPU96 Product Line ........................................................................................ 16
3.2.1 SITRAS ® DPU 96 PU Central Unit 17
3.2.2 SITRAS® DPU 96 PU Central Unit with Profibus Interface 17
3.2.3 Additional functions of central unit (extended version) 18
3.2.4 SITRAS® DPU96BA DC Buffer Amplifier 19
3.2.5 SITRAS® DPU96BA DC Buffer Amplifier (Extended Version) 19
3.2.6 SITRAS® DPU96 VD Voltage Divider Module 20
3.2.7 SITRAS® DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module 20
3.2.8 SITRAS® DPU96 SW PC Application Software 20

4 Transport and storage................................................................................................................. 21


4.1 Transport conditions ........................................................................................................21
4.2 Packing............................................................................................................................ 21
4.3 Checks on receipt............................................................................................................ 21
4.4 Storage............................................................................................................................ 21

VT39DR Page 3 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Contents

5 Installation and commissioning................................................................................................... 23


5.1 Installation ....................................................................................................................... 23
5.1.1 Installation rules 23
5.1.2 Connecting rules 24
5.1.3 SITRAS DPU96 PU Central Unit 24
5.1.4 SITRAS DPU96 BA DC Buffer amplifier (Basic Version) 34
5.1.5 SITRAS DPU96 BA DC Buffer Amplifier (Extended Version) 36
5.1.6 SITRAS DPU96 VD Voltage Divider Module 39
5.1.7 Block diagram for DC buffer amplifier and voltage divider module 42
5.1.8 Installation of SITRAS DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module 43
5.1.9 Dimension drawing of the SITRAS DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module 44
5.1.10 Interface assignment for SITRAS DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module 45
5.2 Commissioning................................................................................................................ 48
5.2.1 Calibration after initial switch-on 48
5.2.2 Aids in commissioning the cable monitor module 50
5.2.3 Switching on and off during operation 50

6 Function and Operation .............................................................................................................. 51


6.1 SITRAS® DPU96 PU Central Unit .................................................................................... 51
6.1.1 Operating principles 51
6.1.2 Parameters 54
6.1.3 Window Action 57
6.1.4 Operating states 58
6.1.5 Saving methods 58
6.1.6 Display windows 64
6.2 PROFIBUS connection for SITRAS® DPU96 ................................................................. 115
6.2.1 Introduction 115
6.2.2 PROFIBUS: Brief technical description 115
6.2.3 Parameter communication function 117
6.2.4 Transfer profiles 121
6.2.5 Time synchronisation (Option for PROFIBUS connection) 126
6.3 Central unit additional functions (extended level)........................................................... 126
6.3.1 General remarks about the options 126
6.3.2 Section feeder control function 127
6.3.3 Cable monitoring function with SITRAS® DPU96 CI 162

SITRAS DPU96 Page 4 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Contents

6.3.4 Power / energy calculation (E10433-E9705-F009) 168


6.3.5 Breaker stressing 170
6.3.6 Communication 170

7 Maintenance............................................................................................................................. 171
7.1 Maintenance instructions............................................................................................... 171
7.1.1 General remarks 171
7.1.2 Trip circuit test 171
7.2 Servicing........................................................................................................................ 172
7.2.1 Spare parts 172
7.2.2 Cleaning 173
7.3 Repair ............................................................................................................................ 173
7.3.1 Unit test and monitoring functions 173
7.3.2 Dispatch of defective components 175

8 Disposal and Recycling............................................................................................................. 177

9 Technical Data .......................................................................................................................... 179


9.1 SITRAS® DPU96 PU Central Unit .................................................................................. 179
9.2 SITRAS® DPU96 PU Central Unit with Profibus ............................................................ 180
9.3 SITRAS® DPU96 BA Buffer Amplifier Basic Version...................................................... 182
9.4 SITRAS® DPU96 BA Buffer Amplifier Extended Version ............................................... 183
9.5 SITRAS® DPU96 VD Voltage Divider Module................................................................ 184
9.6 SITRAS® DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module................................................................... 185

10 Problem report form.............................................................................................................. 187

11 List of Parameters ................................................................................................................. 189


11.1 List of parameters (in numerical order) .......................................................................... 189
11.2 List of parameters (sorted according to main group)...................................................... 195

12 List of Messages................................................................................................................... 203

13 Abbreviations ........................................................................................................................ 207

14 List of figures ........................................................................................................................ 207

15 Index ..................................................................................................................................... 211

VT39DR Page 5 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Contents

SITRAS DPU96 Page 6 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
General

 +IRIVEP

 -QTSVXERXMRJSVQEXMSR
These operating instructions apply to the type and version of the product as quoted on the cover.
All the options that can be supplied are described in these operating instructions. Please refer to
the delivery note to find out which options have been implemented in your unit.
These operating instructions are intended to familiarise personnel working with the product about
the construction and operating principle of the product.

NOTE
For reasons of clarity these operating instructions do not contain fully detailed informa-
tion on all product types and cannot cover all conceivable details of erection, operation
or maintenance.
Should you require further information or should special problems occur which are not
dealt with in sufficient detail in the operating instructions, please contact the local
Siemens Company.
We would also like to point out that the contents of these operating instructions are
not part of an earlier or current arrangement, confirmation or legal relationship or a
modification thereof.
All obligations of Siemens result from the particular sales contract which also contains
the full exclusively valid warranty arrangements. These contractual warranty arrange-
ments are neither restricted nor extended by these operating instructions.

VT39DR Page 7 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
General

WARNING
Death or serious bodily injury may occur if you do not follow these operating instruc-
tions.
During the operation of electrical equipment certain parts of this equipment are likely
to be under a dangerous electrical voltage.
Follow the warning information in these operating instructions and on the product.
Read the operating instructions completely before the installation.
Keep these operating instructions on hand so that you can refer to important informa-
tion at any time.
Trouble-free operation of the product assumes correct transport, proper storage, erec-
tion and installation as well as careful operation and maintenance.

 7XVYGXYVISJXLISTIVEXMRKMRWXVYGXMSRW
These operating instructions are subdivided into fifteen sections, the contents of which are briefly
described below:

1. General
The chapter General gives on overview of the contents and explanations on how to use the oper-
ating instructions.

2. Safety
Important safety information which you must observe when using this product can be found in the
chapter Safety.

3. Purpose and application


The features and correct application of the product are described in the chapter Purpose and appli-
cation.

4. Transport and storage


Instructions on the transport and storage of this product form the contents of Chapter 4.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 8 von 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
General

5. Installation and commissioning


Information about correct installation and commissioning, dimensional illustrations and the connec-
tor assignment can be found in Chapter 5.

6. Function and operation


Full explanations about operation and an explanation of all functions can be found in Chapter 6.

7. Maintenance
A prerequisite for a long service life of this product is careful maintenance which forms the subject
of Chapter 7. Here, you will also find a list of replacement parts in which all components are listed
with the corresponding ordering number.

8. Disposal
In Chapter 8 you will find what you need to do for correct disposal.

9. Technical data
A tabular listing of the technical data can be found in Chap. 9.

10. Problem reporting


Fax form for use if problems should occur with this product or with the operating instructions.

11. List of parameters


A list of all parameters used.

12. Message list


A list of all messages used.

13. Abbreviations
Summary of abbreviations used.

14. List of illustrations


Overview of the illustrations and graphics in the operating instructions.

VT39DR Page 9 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
General

15. Index
Alphanumerical index with the most important terms for reference purposes.

 )\TPEREXMSRSJXLIX]TIWSJVITVIWIRXEXMSRYWIH
In order to ensure clarity in the operating instructions, the following formats, shown as examples,
have been used.
[11] A number enclosed in square brackets indicates a parameter. A list of
all parameters can be taken from Chapter 11.
M The M indicates message parameters for the group signal in the
automation system. Please take detailed information from Chapter 6.
Display With the display windows, black lettering on a grey background rep-
resents a main group. Please take detailed information from Chapter
6.
Peak values White lettering on a blue background in the display windows repre-
sents a subgroup.

 )VVSVWTVSFPIQWVIUYMVIQIRXW
Please inform us of errors, problems and your requirements for the product and for the operating
instructions. Please use the problem report form in Chapter 10.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 10 von 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Safety

 7EJIX]

 4VSTIVYWI

WARNING
If this product is not used properly, death, serious bodily injury, substantial property
damage and environmental damage may result.

The operational quality management system ensures a consistently high quality standard, in par-
ticular with regard to conformance to safety and occupational health requirements.
The product must be used properly for its intended purpose.
Proper use occurs when:
• the product is operated according to the agreed conditions of supply and to the specified
technical data.
• where applicable, the jigs and special tools also supplied are used exclusively for the intended
purpose and employed in accordance with the quoted information in the operating instruc-
tions.

You should refrain from any other use unless express written agreement has been obtained from
Siemens AG.
If the quoted prerequisites and conditions are not maintained or the warning information not fol-
lowed, then there is a hazard due to:
• electrical voltage
• falling and/or tilting parts and dangerous restrictive spaces due to moving parts.

 4IVWSRRIPUYEPMJMGEXMSRW
A person is qualified when he/she is familiar with the:
• installation,
• construction,
• operation and
• maintenance of the product and
• the associated hazards.

VT39DR Page 11 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Safety

Furthermore all persons who carry out installation, commissioning, operation and maintenance on
the product must have qualifications and experience in the following principles of:
• installation methods,
• working in accordance to and on the basis of drawings,
• working in accordance to operating instructions,
• accident prevention and safety arrangements,
• commissioning methods and routines,
• first aid.

 )\TPEREXMSRWEFSYX[EVRMRKRSXIW
In these operating instructions warning notes are used in conjunction with the salient words:
• Note,
• Important,
• Warning,
• Danger

to indicate the degree of hazard.


This type of warning note can also be fitted to the product in the form of labels, stamps or stick-
ers.

DANGER
within the meaning of these operating instructions and the warning labels on the prod-
ucts themselves signifies that death or severe peronal injury will occur if the warning
notes in these operating instructions and on the product itself are not followed.

WARNING
within the meaning of these operating instructions and the warning labels on the prod-
ucts themselves signifies that death or severe personal injury can occur if the warning
notes in these operating instructions and on the product itself are not followed.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 12 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Safety

IMPORTANT
within the meaning of these operating instructions and the warning notes on the prod-
ucts themselves signifies that light personal injury or damage to the equipment may
occur if the warning notes in these operating instructions and on the product itself are
not followed.

NOTE
within the meaning of these operating instructions is an important item of information
on the product or the relevant part of the documentation to which special attention is
to be drawn.

 7EJIX]VIUYMVIQIRXW
Follow the generally applicable and legally binding safety requirements.
Give regular instruction to the personnel about the currently valid regulations and requirements,
the generally applicable accident prevention regulations and the legally binding safety require-
ments.

 )PIGXVMGEPLE^EVHWSYVGIW

DANGER
Danger to life due to high electrical voltage!
A dangerous voltage is present on electrical systems in operation.
Follow the warning notes in these operating instructions and on the product.

VT39DR Page 13 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Safety

SITRAS DPU96 Page 14 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Purpose and use

 4YVTSWIERHYWI

 7IGXMSRJIIHIVTVSXIGXMSRMRXLIVIGXMJMIVWYFWXEXMSR
The individual supply sections in a DC contact line system are fed through so-called section feed-
ers. Here is also located the DC high speed circuit breaker which, together with the protection
equipment, protects system parts such as
• the feeder cable
• contact line network
• and unprotected vehicle components
• from overload

To ensure cost optimisation during operation, system loads are set as high as possible. However,
it is also expected that the protective devices switch off reliably and quickly when a fault occurs.

 6IUYMVIQIRXWSRXLIWIGXMSRJIIHIVTVSXIGXMSR
• Detection and tripping of short-circuits and overloads in the supply section.
• Limiting in magnitude and duration due to fast reaction times and fast tripping of the current.
• Fast tripping to minimise the mechanical and thermal stresses on the system parts.
• Correct grading of protective devices within the overall substation concept.

In order to satisfy as many of these requirements as possible, there is a range of protective func-
tions for selection and use.

 4VSXIGXMZIJYRGXMSR
The protective functions can be ordered into the three following functional groups:
Short-circuit protection consisting of:
• Overcurrent protection
• Rate of rise-of-current tripping

Overload protection consisting of


• Definite-time overcurrent-time protection
• Thermal overload protection

Other system protection


• Supply cable monitoring
• Voltage monitoring

VT39DR Page 15 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Purpose and use

 7-86%7(494VSHYGX0MRI
The SITRAS® DPU96 Digital Protective Unit and Controller has been developed on the basis of
microprocessors. The system protects DC switchgear and contact line equipment against overload
and detects short circuits during the rise of current before the maximum short-circuit currents are
reached.
Version 2.0 has been produced from the consistent further development of the system. It replaces
Version 1.0 and complements the range of products and devices. The range of functions can be
substantially extended with options that can be integrated.

DC High-Speed
Circuit breaker Shunt current measurement Section feeder
Busbar

9ROWDJH &DEOH

Control panel GLYLGHU PRQLWRU

Section feeder panel PRGXOH PRGXOH

Intertripping functions

Bypass bus disconnector


Interlock & release '&EXIIHU

Test current recognition DPSOLILHU


Residual resistance
determination &HQWUDOXQLW

Cable monitoring for two


modules

Power and energy Option administration Protection


calculation function
Combination bus Integrated operator
Memory
Profibus panel and LC display
Circuit breaker loading
Additional functions Basic functions
Memory
Circuit breaker loading

3&DSSOLFDWLRQ

VRIWZDUH Indicating instruments


PC

Fig. 1: System configuration

The following components are included in the product line:


• SITRAS® DPU96 PU
Central Unit
• SITRAS® DPU96 PU
Central Unit with Profibus Interface
• SITRAS® DPU96 BA
DC Buffer Amplifier (Basic Version)
• SITRAS® DPU96 BA
DC Buffer Amplifier (Extended Version)
• SITRAS® DPU96 VD
Voltage Divider Module
• SITRAS® DPU96 CI
Cable Monitor Module

SITRAS DPU96 Page 16 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Purpose and use

• SITRAS® DPU96 SW
Application Software

 7-86%7(4949'IRXVEP9RMX
The central unit serves to protect the contact lines against overloads and detects short circuits
during the current rise even before the maximum operating currents are reached.
The digital design of the central unit leads to a greatly extended functional scope.
The extensive and free parameterizaton of the central unit provides the necessary capability for
adapting to individual conditions.

Features
• Imax (static overcurrent analysis)
• ∆I (current surge analysis)
• di/dt (current rate of rise analysis)
• thermal protection
• definite-time overcurrent-time protection
• voltage monitoring
• measurement memory
• event memory
• alarm memory

with additional selectable functions


• section control
• cable insulation monitoring
• power, energy calculation
• switchgear loading

 7-86%7(4949'IRXVEP9RMX[MXL4VSJMFYW-RXIVJEGI
This device has the following features in addition to those quoted in 1.2.1:

Features:
• Communication with PROFIBUS DP
• Option for time synchronisation.

3.2.2.1 Communication
Bus communication with electrical isolation via PROFIBUS DP to EN 50170, Part 2 and DIN 19245
T3.
• transfer of status information
• transfer of measured values
• transfer of control commands
• transfer of control parameters

VT39DR Page 17 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Purpose and use

 %HHMXMSREPJYRGXMSRWSJGIRXVEPYRMX I\XIRHIHZIVWMSR


The extended version offers various additional functions. These functions provide control and
automation of the section switchgear in the rectifier substations, e.g. SITRAS® 8MF94. The dif-
ferent central units in a section substation can communicate directly with a central signalling sys-
tem via PROFIBUS.
All functions can be integrated into the central unit. The free parameterization of the equipment
functions ensures adaptation to any customer requirements that are needed.
The optional functions can be isolated even after the equipment has been installed in a system. In
doing this the operation is not affected.

3.2.3.1 Feeder panel control


• Control of the high-speed DC circuit breaker with switch position monitoring.
• Indication of the position of the high-speed circuit breaker (flashes during section test).
• Selectable operator level “local/remote”.
• “Direct ON” function
• Test and automatic reclose function
− Reclose without short-circuit test if voltage is present on cable output.
− Test cycle, test periods and residual resistance from voltage measurement can be config-
ured for the reclosure.
− Indication of test result.
− Detection of “sustained short-circuit”.
− Detection of unsuccessful reclosure”.
• Additional opening of the high-speed circuit breaker with and without switching off the auto-
matic test facility.
• Additional preconditions for the start of the section test.
• Fault diagnosis for safety-critical outputs.
• Criteria for group alarm can be configured.
• “Group fault” indication
Detail reports in event memory can be interrogated.
• “Sustained short-circuit” indication (section blocked).
• Trigger external switch operation counter.
• Frame fault processing (fault current)
Options for the feeder panel control function
• Intertripping of the high-speed DC circuit breaker in the neighbouring substation or tripping of
own breaker due to intertripping by the neighbouring substation.
• Interlocks on the bypass bus disconnector for the section feeder panels with bypass.
• Section residual resistance calculation using voltage and current test measurement (matched
DC buffer amplifier necessary).

3.2.3.2 Cable insulation monitoring


in conjunction with DC buffer amplifier and cable monitor module.
• Short circuit between conductor and screen.
• Short circuit between screen and earth.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 18 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Purpose and use

• Screen break.
• Loss of insulation.

for two separate screened cables with positive potential on the conductor.

3.2.3.3 Power / energy calculation


• Incoming and recovered power over an adjustable time period.
• Incoming and recovered energy for the section feeder.

3.2.3.4 Storage of breaker loading (switching statistics)


• Addition of currents interrupted by the high-speed DC circuit breaker
• Display of the last interrupted current.

 7-86%7(49&%('&YJJIV%QTPMJMIV

Measurement of
• Section feeder current
• Test voltage
• Section feeder voltage

The DC buffer amplifier and voltage divider modules are used for electrical isolation and the meas-
urement of current and voltage.
The measured values are output to the SITRAS® DPU96 PU Central Unit via a fibre-optic cable.
Analogue outputs are also available

 7-86%7(49&%('&YJJIV%QTPMJMIV )\XIRHIH:IVWMSR

Measurement of
• Section feeder current
• Test voltage
• Section feeder voltage
• Section test current
• Cable monitoring for two cable monitor modules

The DC buffer amplifier and voltage divider modules are used for electrical isolation and the meas-
urement of current and voltage.
The measured values are output to the SITRAS® DPU96 PU Central Unit via a fibre-optic cable.
Analogue outputs are also available

VT39DR Page 19 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Purpose and use

 7-86%7(49:(:SPXEKI(MZMHIV1SHYPI
A voltage divider module is also needed for electrically isolated voltage measurement. It matches
the input signal on the DC buffer amplifier to the operating voltage.

Features
Universal voltage divider for system voltages up to 4 kV.

 7-86%7(49'-'EFPI1SRMXSV1SHYPI
The cable monitor module is suitable for monitoring screened feeder cables in traction power sup-
ply systems up to 2000 V DC (4000 V DC on request).
Connection can be made to any cable with a concentric screen and conductor and having an insu-
lating outer sheath.
The cable monitor module is used for the measurement of the insulation resistance on the feeder
cables. Also, the cable screen can be monitored for breakage.
The measured values are transferred to the central unit via the DC buffer amplifier. The central unit
evaluates the measurements and displays the result.
The cable monitor module is electrically isolated from the central unit by the DC buffer amplifier.

 7-86%7(497;4'%TTPMGEXMSR7SJX[EVI
The protective unit stores and processes a large amount of information. With the SITRAS® DPU96
SW PC Software, the functions of the protective unit can be used conveniently and effectively.
The PC software offers easy-to-use, menu-guided parameterization and operation under MS Win-
dows 95.

PC software functions:
• Convenient parameterization of the protective unit
• Parameter administration
• Archive for the parameter settings
• Printing of the parameter settings
• Graphic display of the current characteristics
• Graphic evaluation of current characteristics

• Archive for measurement results


• Evaluation of the event memory
• Evaluation of the alarm memory
• Statistics functions
• Printing of measurement results and evaluations
• Export of data to standard software via ASCII files

The PC should fulfil the following minimum performance requirements:


• 486 processor
• 8 MB RAM
• 10 MB HD

SITRAS DPU96 Page 20 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Transport and storage

 8VERWTSVXERHWXSVEKI

 8VERWTSVXGSRHMXMSRW
The means of transport for carrying the equipment must be suitable with regard to its construction
and load capability.

 4EGOMRK
All components are delivered as standard in a so-called “universal packing”. The carton is labelled
with the nameplate using a sticker.

 'LIGOWSRVIGIMTX
The shipment must be checked immediately on receipt for damage and for completeness based
on the delivery notes.

NOTE
If the shipment shows damage, the extent of damage and its cause must be deter-
mined without delay, recorded in writing and made known to the manufacturer. With
damage in transit the shipper must be involved to note the facts. A written record is
essential for damage compensation claims.

 7XSVEKI

IMPORTANT
The components must be stored in closed, dry rooms. The storage temperature must
be between–25°C and +70°C.

During storage it is recommended that the components are covered to protect them from dirt.

VT39DR Page 21 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Transport and storage

SITRAS DPU96 Page 22 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

 -RWXEPPEXMSRERHGSQQMWWMSRMRK

WARNING
Safe operation of the digital protective unit requires that it is properly installed and
commissioned by qualified personnel following the warning notes in these operating
instructions.
In particular the valid erection and safety regulations for work on electrical power in-
stallations (e.g. DIN, VDE) should be followed as well as the correct application of tools
and the use of personal protective gear (safety goggles or similar).
If these warnings are ignored, death, severe personal injury or substantial property
damage may occur.

 -RWXEPPEXMSR

 -RWXEPPEXMSRVYPIW

IMPORTANT
An insufficient amount of cooling air can lead to overheating and damage to the
equipment.

• When connecting the cables, ensure that no impermissibly high forces act on the connec-
tions.
• Provide an adequate supply of cooling air.
• Please ensure the specified minimum distances and the permissible ambient temperatures.
These details can be taken from Chap. 9, page 179.

VT39DR Page 23 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

 'SRRIGXMRKVYPIW

WARNING
The exterior surfaces of the unearthed switchgear may carry a dangerous voltage. This
may lead to death, severe personal injuries or substantial property damage.
The specific requirements with regard to earthing should be taken from the safety
regulations (e.g. DIN, VDE) and all other relevant national or local regulations.

• DIN VDE 0100 and DIN VDE 0160 must be followed.


• The unit must be earthed via its earth conductor terminal in accordance with the equipment
design.

The protective units must be installed in the appropriate operating plants and access restricted to
authorised persons.

 7-86%7(4949'IRXVEP9RMX

5.1.3.1 Installing the SITRAS DPU96 PU Central Unit


The protective unit must be installed in the switching station at an easily accessible point. The unit
should be operated from a secure power supply. Connection is made according to the circuit dia-
gram; with DC voltages correct polarity of the connection voltage must be ensured. The housing
can be mounted using clip-on mounts on top-hat rails (EN 50022-35) or on SIMATIC S5 standard
rails (6ES5 710-8maxx).

NOTE
Ensure that the clip-on mounting is locked.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 24 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.3.2 Dimension drawing for the SITRAS DPU96 PU Central Unit

65 mm
250 mm

135 mm
35 mm
6,75$6'3838

U1

U2

U3

Fuse

50 mm
+ -

m
m
0
14
LEDs Fuse LCD Keys Cursor keys

Fig. 2: Overview of the digital protective unit and controller

The minimum free space of at least 50 mm beneath the unit is defined by the process signal con-
nector, optical fibre connector, the bending radius of the optical fibre cable and the size of the
connecting plug for the serial connection to the PC.
The LEDs indicate the operating state of the power supply.
LED U1 is lit: Buffer amplifier supply is ready.
LED U2 is lit: Central unit supply is ready.
LED U3 is lit: Supply for the digital inputs and outputs and other 24 V equipment is
ready.

VT39DR Page 25 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

View from below


250

X3 X4 X5

27 39 40 52
X2 1 13 14 26

129
140
X6
1 5

X1

Figures in mm

227
View from the front View from the left
250

SITRAS DPU96 PU

U1
U2
U3

135
135

Fuse

+ -

142

Fig. 3: Dimension drawing for the digital protective unit.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 26 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.3.3 Block diagram of central unit

Parameter CB ON
Power block Acknowledge checkback
supply changeover messages message
+ -
Q0

+ 24 V
X1:3 :2 :1 X2:52 X2:19 X2:45 X2:16

,QSXW
+ 24 V X2:27 X4

Power supply to DC PROFIBUS


buffer amplifier
0V X2:1
Digital Protective Unit interface
E10433-E9x02-Hxxx
X6
X3
Design
Optic fibre cable link for -Hxx1 2XWSXW
measurements from DC PC interface
X1:5 :4 X2:28 :2 X2:29 :30 :31 :32 :33 :34 X2:4 X2:3 (V 24)
buffer amplifier

Analogue
Q0 output 0,5 s 1s Q0
+/- 10V
Tripping 250 Tripping
20 mA Messages Tripping 24 V
V counter

Fig. 4: Block diagram – central unit

5.1.3.4 Interface definition for the central unit


Interface connector X1: Terminal Available Remarks
Supply interface
Device ground -X1:1 from Version 1 high impedance and capacitive
with respect to X1:2
System supply : -X1:2 .-Hx0x (24-90V) with DC L-; with AC N
.-Hx1x (90-250V) AC only for order no. –Hx1x
System supply : -X1:3 .-Hx0x (24-90V) with DC L+; with AC L1
.-Hx1x (90-250V) AC only for order no. –Hx1x.
Capacitor trip -X1:4 from Version 1 see Fig. 5, page 34
Capacitor trip DC 250V -X1:5 .... -Hxx0 with depends on order number
.... -Hxx1 without

Cables with a thickness of 0.2 to 4 mm2 can be connected to the interface connector –X1.

VT39DR Page 27 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Interface connector X3: Pin Available Remarks


Communications interface / RS 232
No connection -X3:1 from Version 1 Serial
TXD -X3:2 from Version 1 interface
RXD -X3:3 from Version 1 to PC
No connection -X3:4 from Version 1
Ground -X3:5 from Version 1 9 pole
No connection -X3:6 from Version 1 standard plug
CTS -X3:7 from Version 1
RTS -X3:8 from Version 1
No connection -X3:9 from Version 1

Interface connector X4: Pin Available Remark


Profibus interface
Screen -X4:1 from Version 2 Screen
with Profibus
- -X4:2 from Version 2 Not used
with Profibus
B (RxD/TxD-P) -X4:3 from Version 2 Receive / send line for Data plus
with Profibus
CNTR-P -X4:4 from Version 2 Control signal for repeater direc-
with Profibus tion control
DGND (signal ground) -X4:5 from Version 2 Data transfer potential
with Profibus (ground to 5V)
VP (+ 5V) -X4:6 from Version 2 Supply volt. for termination resis-
with Profibus tance –P (P5V)
- -x4:7 from Version 2 Not used
with Profibus
A (RxD/TxD-N) -X4:8 from Version 2 Receive / send line for Data N
with Profibus
CNTR-N -X4:9 from Version 2 Repeater control signal
with Profibus for direction control

Interface connector X5:: -X5 Not yet available Remark: Later option

Interface connector X6: FSMA Available Remarks


Feeder voltage / feeder current / -X6:1 from Version 1 Optical fibre link from DC buffer
test voltage / test current / cable insulation amplifier
values

SITRAS DPU96 Page 28 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Interface connector X2: Terminal Available Remarks


Process interface
Buffer amplifier DC 24V ground -X2:1 from Version 1 Supply DC buffer amplifier..

Ground, analogue output -X2:2 from Version 1


(A10) CB OFF (trip) -X2:3 from Version 1 Pulse 1s (depends on [711] or
[83])
(A11) Operations counter -X2:4 from Version 1 Pulse 1s after switching on
(A12) Enable -X2:5 from Version 2, Drive for enable contactor
opt. control

(A13) CB On indicator / test -X2:6 from Version 2, Indicator CB On / flash for test
opt. control
(A14) CB On -X2:7 from Version 2, Control signal pulse (depends on
opt. control [711] or [83])
(A15) CB Off indicator -X2:8 from Version 2, Indicator CB Off
opt. control
(A16) Section test contactor on -X2:9 from Version 2, Drive for test contactor
opt. control

Ground -X2:10 from Version 1


Ground -X2:11 from Version 1
Ground -X2:12 from Version 1 Connected internally
Ground -X2:13 from Version 1 -X2:10-15
Ground -X2:14 from Version 1 Also with -X2:38-39
Ground -X2:15 from Version 1
Auxiliary voltage +24V -X2:16 from Version 1
Auxiliary voltage +24V -X2:17 from Version 1 Connected internally
Auxiliary voltage +24V -X2:18 from Version 1 -X2:16-18
(E1) Acknowledge fault signal -X2:19 from Version 1 Acknowledge action signal

(E2) Selector, remote -X2:20 from Version 2, 1: Remote, 0: Local


opt. control
(E3) CB On, local -X2:21 from Version 2, Switch-on through pos. signal
opt. control edge
(E4) CB Off, local -X2:22 from Version 2, Switch-off through pos. Signal
opt. control edge
(E5) CB On, direct -X2:23 from Version 2, Switch-on through pos. signal
opt. control edge
(E6) CB Off, remote -X2:24 from Version 2, Switch-on through pos. signal
opt. control edge
(E7) CB On, remote -X2:25 from Version 2, Switch-on through pos. signal
opt. control edge
(E8) CB not in operating position -X2:26 from Version 2, 1: CB not in operating position, 0:
opt. control Operating position
Buffer amplifier 24 V plus -X2:27 from Version 1 Supply, DC buffer amplifier
Analogue output -X2:28 from Version 1 Parameterisable (depends on
[22])
(A1) Group alarm -X2:29 Yes / opt. control Active signal with “1”, parame-
terisable (depends on [740-761])
(A2) di/dt trip -X2:30 from Version 1 Active signal with “1”

VT39DR Page 29 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Interface connector X2: Terminal Available Remarks


Process interface

(A3)•∆I trip -X2:31 from Version 1 Active signal with “1”


(A4) Trip, cable temperature -X2:32 from Version 1 Active signal with “1”
(A5) VA5 variable output -X2:33 from Version 2 Parameterisable reaction (de-
pends on [727])
(A6) System ready -X2:34 from Version 1 Active signal with “1”
(A7) Command intertripping circuit -X2:35 from Version 2, Command output to neighbouring
opt. intertripping substation
function
(A8) Sustained short-circuit -X2:36 from Version 2, Indication / remote signal
opt. control
(A9) VA9 variable output -X2:37 from Version 2, Parameterisable reaction
opt. control [728]
Ground -X2:38 from Version 1 Connected internally
Ground -X2:39 from Version 1 Also with -X2:10-15
(E9) CB not in test position -X2:40 from Version 2, 1: CB not in test position, 0: Test
opt. control position

(E10) Frame fault 64 DC -X2:41 from Version 2, RM: Frame fault circuit
opt. control
(E11) M.c.b. operation -X2:42 from Version 2, RM: M.c.b. operation
opt. control
(E12) Intertripping circuit -X2:43 from Version 2, Request from neighbouring sub-
opt. intertripping station
function

(E13) CB open -X2:44 from Version 2, RM: CB OFF


opt. control
(E14) CB closed -X2:45 from Version 2, RM: CB ON
opt. control
(E15) Section test contactor closed -X2:46 from Version 2, RM: Test contactor ON
opt. control
(E16) VE16 variable input -X2:47 from Version 2, Parameterisable reaction [722]
opt. control ( can be integrated into group
signal )
(E17) VE17 variable input -X2:48 from Version 2, Parameterisable reaction [723]
opt. control ( can be integrated into group
signal )
(E18) VE18 variable input -X2:49 from Version 2, Parameterisable reaction
opt. control [724]
(E19) VE19 variable input -X2:50 from Version 2, Parameterisable reaction
opt. control [725]
(E20) VE20 variable input -X2:51 from Version 2, Parameterisable reaction [726]
opt. control
(E21) Parameter block selection -X2:52 from Version 1 Parablock1 = “0”,
Parablock2 = “1”
2
Cable with a thickness of 0.2 to 2.5 mm can be connected to the interface connector –X2.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 30 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Explanations
The signals conform to the following voltages:
“0“ ⇒ 0V “1“ ⇒ 24V
A suppresser circuit is required for inductive loads. When driving the output, a connection is made
to the +24V internally (-X2:16-18).
Outputs:
A1 (-X2:29): With automation operation: Group alarm parameterisable
Without automation option: Common signal for all protective
functions
A2 (-X2:30): Signal of di/dt trip (delayed trip)
A3 (-X2:31): Signal of Imax or ∆I trip (delayed trip)
A4 (-X2:32): Signal output for the temperature trip.
This output remains driven until the calculated temperature has reduced by the amount set in
[119] Hysteresis, cable temperature.
A5 (-X2:33): Signal output freely parameterisable (in the basic state the command
bit of the Profibus information is output), adjustable under Parameter
[727].
A6 (-X2:34): The system signal remains at 0V until one of the following system
signals is present:
• Optical fibre failure
• C error
• Supply failure
• Shunt failure
• Readback output
• These messages are described in detail in Chapter 12 List of signals.

A7 (-X2:35): Intertripping signal on the corresponding circuit breaker in the


neighbouring substation.
A8 (-X2:36): Sustained short circuit signal, section feeder blocked
A9 (-X2:37): Signal output freely parameterisable (in the basic state the command
bit of the Profibus information is output), adjustable under Parameter
[728].
A10 (-X2:3): Trip output with very fast response.
A11 (-X2:4): Drive output for operations counter.
A12 (-X2:5): Drive output for enable contactor (backing up critical output signals)
A13 (-X2:6): Signal output for indicator On / Test
A14 (-X2:7): Drive output for switch-on (pulse), varies depending the selected
breaker mechanism [711]
A15 (-X2:8): Signal output for indictor Off
A16 (-X2:9): Drive output of test contactor for the section test.

VT39DR Page 31 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Inputs:
E1 (-X2:19): Acknowledge action signal (e.g. via a process signal CB ON).
E2 (-X2:20): Input for selector switch, local / remote operation (i.e. 24V = remote
operation).
E3 (-X2:21): Switch-on command, CB ON local (operation through positive signal
edge).
E4 (-X2:22): Switch-off command CB OFF local (operation through positive signal
edge).
E5 (-X2:23): Switch-on command CB On direct (operation through positive signal
edge).
without activation of automatic test and reclosure.
E6 (-X2:24): Switch-off command CB OFF remote (operation through positive
signal edge).
E7 (-X2:25): Switch-on command, CB ON remote (operation through positive si-
gnal edge).
E8 (-X2:26): Input for operating position signal negated (i.e. 24V = not in operating
position).
E9 (-X2:40): Input for disconnected position signal negated (i.e. 24V = not in dis-
connected position).
E10 (-X2:41): Input for frame fault signal 64 DC in substation (i.e. 24V = frame
fault).
E11 (-X2:42): Input for m.c.b. operation.
E12 (-X2:43): Intertripping function switch-off command from corresponding circuit
breaker in neighbouring substation with evaluation of the pulse
length.
E13 (-X2:44): Checkback input CB open.
E14 (-X2:45): Checkback input CB closed.
E15 (-X2:46): Checkback input test contactor closed.
E16 (-X2:47): Signal input freely parameterisable (in the basic state the input signal
is entered as the signalling bit in the Profibus information), adjustable
under parameter [722].
E17 (-X2:48): Signal input freely parameterisable (in the basic state the input signal
is entered as the signalling bit in the Profibus information), adjustable
under parameter [723].
E18 (-X2:49): Signal input freely parameterisable (in the basic state the input signal
is entered as the signalling bit in the Profibus information), adjustable
under parameter [724].
E19 (-X2:50): Signal input freely parameterisable (in the basic state the input signal
is entered as the signalling bit in the Profibus information), adjustable
under parameter [725].

SITRAS DPU96 Page 32 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

E20 (-X2:51): Signal input freely parameterisable (in the basic state the input signal
is entered as the signalling bit in the Profibus information), adjustable
under parameter [726].
E21 (-X2:52): Selection between Parameter blocks 1 and 2 via this input with signal
edge.

VT39DR Page 33 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

The signal outputs remain driven until the signal is acknowledged.


The signal status of these inputs and outputs can be viewed with the Parameters [160-164].
The outputs of the capacitor trip (-X1:4; -X1:5) must always be connected to the trip coil.
This ensures that the protective unit can monitor the supply of the stored energy to the trip coil
and the capacitor charging process.

Recharge

470 Ω

UC
250 V 1800 µF

Trip

Fig. 5 Capacitor trip

 7-86%7(49&%('&YJJIVEQTPMJMIV &EWMG:IVWMSR

5.1.4.1 Installation of SITRAS DPU96 BA DC Buffer Amplifier (Basic Version)


The DC buffer amplifier must be installed in the vicinity of the shunt (min. 10cm up to 80cm). The
housing should be mounted using clip mounts on a top-hat rail (EN 50022-35).
The measurement sensor input line must be twisted with at least one twist per cm of line length
and kept as short as possible (max. 20 cm to 30 cm). With a longer distance between the shunt
and buffer amplifier (more than 30 cm) a twisted and screened line must be used.
The input line must be connected, avoiding the formation of loops where possible, and laid sepa-
rate from other lines.
The output lines to the measurement devices must be laid separately from the other lines.
The digital protective unit must be connected to the buffer amplifier through an optical fibre cable.
The buffer amplifier is normally supplied with voltage from the central unit.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 34 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.4.2 Dimension drawing of the SITRAS DPU96 BA DC Buffer Amplifier (Basic Version)

View from the left

Optical bibre
cable

70
73
118

121

View from the front Figures in mm


100
18

29 27 25
UEU - UEI +
35

SITRAS DPU96 BA
73

150 90 60
24V 0V Ut 0V UAU 0V UAI 0V COM
mV mV mV

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 10 11 12 13 14 15

Fig. 6 Dimension drawing – DC buffer amplifier

VT39DR Page 35 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.4.3 SITRAS DPU96 BA interface assignment (basic version)


Text Abbrevia- Terminal Remark
tion
Device ground 1
Supply L+ 24V 2 From protective unit
Supply L- 0V 3 From protective unit
Not used 4 Not used
Analogue output for automatic test system, 16 Ut 5 ±10V/ 20mA => (UEU+ - UEU-)/16
times gain
Ground for test voltage 0V 6
Analogue output, voltmeter UAU 7 ±10V/ 20mA => (UEU+ - UEU-)
Ground, voltmeter 0V 8
Not used 9 Not used
Analogue output, ammeter UAI 10 ±10V/ 20mA => (UEI+ - UEI-)*
10V / calibration
Ground, ammeter 0V 11
Calibration on output current (shunt) 150mV 12 No connection corresponds to
300 mV
Calibration on output current (shunt) 90mV 13
Calibration on output current (shunt) 60mV 14
Connection point for calibration COM 15
Not used 16-24 Not used
Input, shunt connection + UEI+ 25 300mV = 5x UEI (60mV)
Not used 26 Not used
Input, shunt connection - / voltmeter + UEI- / UEU+ 27
Not used 28 Not used
Input voltmeter - UEU- 29 Connection for voltage divider
module
Output voltage measurement
range
Optical fibre cable connection to protective unit LWL FSMA All measurement information
output current and voltage, test
voltage
Cable with a solid wire thickness of 1x4 mm2 or 1x2.5 mm2 stranded with wire-end ferrules ac-
2
cording to DIN 46 220 or 2x 1.5 mm stranded with wire-end ferrules to DIN 46 220 can be con-
nected.

 7-86%7(49&%('&YJJIV%QTPMJMIV )\XIRHIH:IVWMSR

5.1.5.1 Installation of SITRAS DPU96 BA DC Buffer Amplifier (Extended Version)


The DC buffer amplifier must be installed in the vicinity of the shunt (min. 10cm up to 80cm max).
The housing should be mounted using clip mounts on a top-hat rail (EN 50022-35).
The measurement sensor input line must be twisted with at least one twist per cm of line length
and kept as short as possible (max. 20 cm to 30 cm). With a longer distance between the shunt
and buffer amplifier (more than 30 cm) a twisted and screened line must be used.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 36 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

The input line must be connected avoiding the formation of loops where possible and laid separate
from other lines.
The output lines to the measurement devices must be laid separately from the other lines.
The digital protective unit must be connected to the buffer amplifier through an optical fibre cable.
The buffer amplifier is normally supplied with voltage from the central unit.

5.1.5.2 Dimension drawing of SITRAS DPU96 BA DC Buffer Amplifier (Extended Version)

View from the left

Optical fibre
cable

70
73

118

121

View from the front Figures in mm


100
18

29 27 25 23 22 20 19 17 16
UEU - UEI + +U -
EIP
+ - + -
CH1 CH2
35

SITRAS DPU96 BA
73

150 90 60
24V 0V Ut 0V UAU 0V INV UAI 0V COM
mV mV mV

1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Fig. 7 Dimension drawing – DC buffer amplifier

VT39DR Page 37 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.5.3 SITRAS DPU96 BA interface assignment (extended version)


Text Abbrevia- Terminal Remark
tion
Device ground 1
Supply L+ 24V 2 From protective unit
Supply L- 0V 3 From protective unit
Not used 4 No used
Analogue output for automatic test system, 16 times Ut 5 ±10V/ 20mA => (UEU+ - UEU-)/16
gain
Ground for test voltage 0V 6
Analogue output, voltmeter UAU 7 ±10V/ 20mA => (UEU+ - UEU-)
Ground, voltmeter 0V 8
Inversion of analogue output signals INV 9 For connection with COM
Terminal 15
Analogue output, ammeter UAI 10 ±10V/ 20mA => (UEI+ - UEI-)*
10V / calibration
Ground, ammeter 0V 11
Calibration on output current (shunt) 150mV 12 No connection corresponds to
300 mV
Calibration on output current (shunt) 90mV 13
Calibration on output current (shunt) 60mV 14
Connection point for calibration COM 15
Signal input cable monitor module CH2 - 16 Current interface signal-
No.2 - (10mA)

Signal input cable monitor module CH2 + 17 Current interface signal +


No.2 + (10mA)

Not used 18 Not used


Signal input cable monitor module CH1 - 19 Current interface signal -
No.1 - (10mA)

Signal input cable monitor module CH1 + 20 Current interface signal +


No.1 + (10mA)

Not used 21 Not used


Input, test shunt connection - UEIP- 22
Input, test shunt connection + UEIP+ 23 120mV = 2x UEIP (60mV)
Not used 24 Not used
Input, shunt connection + UEI+ 25 300mV = 5x UEI (60mV)
Not used 26 Not used
Input, shunt connection - / voltage measurement + UEI- / UEU+ 27
Not used 28 Not used
Input, voltage measurement - UEU- 29 Connection for voltage divider
module, output voltage meas-
urement range

SITRAS DPU96 Page 38 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Text Abbrevia- Terminal Remark


tion
Optical fibre connection to protective unit LWL FSMA All measurement information,
output current and voltage, test
current and voltage, cable
measurements from Modules
1 and 2.

2 2
Cable with a solid wire thickness of 1x4 mm or 1x2.5 mm stranded with wire-end ferrules ac-
2
cording to DIN 46 220 or 2x 1.5 mm stranded with wire-end ferrules to DIN 46 220 can be con-
nected.

 7-86%7(49:(:SPXEKI(MZMHIV1SHYPI

5.1.6.1 Installation of SITRAS DPU96 VD Voltage Divider Module


The voltage divider module is mounted on a top-hat rail (EN 50022-35).
The voltage divider module must be arranged to the left of the DC buffer amplifier on the top-hat
rail to keep the lead between the two devices as short as possible.
In order to obtain an adequate signal-to-noise ratio, it is sufficient to keep the connecting lead be-
tween the voltage divider module and the DC buffer amplifier as short as possible.
For operation with the digital protective unit Terminals 2 and 3 must be connected.
A maximum of one nominal voltage according to the standard EN 50163, 11/95 may occur be-
tween the measuring points and the traction earth.

VT39DR Page 39 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.6.2 Dimension drawing for the SITRAS DPU96 VD Voltage Divider Module

View from the left

70
73
118

121

View from the front Figures in mm


100
18

1 2 3 6 10 15
0V 0V 10V 1000V 2000V 4000V

RS
35
73

SITRAS DPU96 VD

Fig. 8 Dimension drawing for voltage divider module

SITRAS DPU96 Page 40 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.6.3 Interface assignment for SITRAS DPU96 VD Voltage Divider Module


Text Terminal Remark
Traction earth 0 V 1 Return conductor
Traction earth 0 V 2 Return conductor
Output range 10 V 3 Connect Terminals 2
and 3
Not used 4-5 Not used
Measurement range 6 Connection
1000 V
Not used 7-9 Not used
Measurement range 10 Connection
2000 V
Not used 11-14 Not used
Measurement range 15 Connection
4000 V
Cable with a solid wire thickness of 1x4 mm2 or 1x2.5 mm2 stranded with wire-end ferrules ac-
2
cording to DIN 46 220 or 2x 1.5 mm stranded with wire-end ferrules to DIN 46 220 can be con-
nected.

VT39DR Page 41 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

 Block diagram for DC buffer amplifier and voltage divider module

/ %XVEDU

Supply from the protective unit


4
6,75$6'38%$
'&%XIIHU$PSOLILHU

2
+24V
25
6KXQW +
0V
3
± 300mV
UEI
1
27
-

COM 15
UEU

± 10V
max. +/- 4000 V LINK UEI / mV UAI / V
29
(Terminal 15) 15 - 14 60 10
15 - 13 90 10 14
15 - 12 150 10

E10433-E9509-H100
- 300 10
Optical fibre cable 13

UAU UTest UAI 12


max.±10V/20mA ±10V max.±10V/20mA
0V 0V 0V

10

11
4
7

Analogue outputs for measurement


instruments

6,75$6'389'
9ROWDJH'LYLGHU0RGXOH
15
4000V

10
2000V

6HFWLRQRXWSXW 1000V
E10439-E9511-

3
10V
H100

2
0V

1
0V
/

Fig. 9 Block diagram for DC buffer amplifier and voltage divider module

SITRAS DPU96 Page 42 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

 -RWXEPPEXMSRSJ7-86%7(49'-'EFPI1SRMXSV1SHYPI
The cable monitor module must be installed in the vicinity of the feeder cable (min. 10cm up to
80cm max.). The housing should be mounted using clip mounts on a top-hat rail (EN 50022-35).
The measurement sensor input line must be kept as short as possible. The input line must be
connected avoiding the formation of loops where possible, and laid separate from other lines.
The output lines to the buffer amplifier form a current interface link. With longer distances be-
tween the cable monitor module and the buffer amplifier a twisted line must be used. The meas-
urements are passed to the buffer amplifier via this line. The buffer amplifier integrates the meas-
urements from the cable monitor module in the optical fibre telegram to the protective unit.
The cable monitor module obtains its supply from the output voltage of the feeder cable. The ca-
ble monitor module starts measurement operation about two seconds after a voltage is applied to
the output. The SITRAS DPU96 BA (Extended Version) should be used as the associated buffer
amplifier.

VT39DR Page 43 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.9 Dimension drawing of the SITRAS DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module

View from the left

Optical fibre
cable

70
73
118

121

View from the front figures in mm


100
18
35

SITRAS DPU96 CI
73

CH1
0V S FB 1kV 2kV 4kV
- +
1 4 5 7 10 11 13 14 15

Fig. 10 Dimension drawing – cable monitor module

SITRAS DPU96 Page 44 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

5.1.10 Interface assignment for SITRAS DPU96 CI Cable Monitor Module


Text Abbrev. Terminal Remark
Traction earth 0 V 0V 1 Traction earth L-
Not used 2,3 Not used
Screen connection S 4 Cable screen connection
Screen connection S 5 Cable screen connection
Not used 0V 6
Screen connection for screen feedback FB 7 Cable screen connection when
using screen feedback
Not used 8,9 Not used
Output voltage up to 1kV 1 kV 10 Supply obtained from output
voltage
Output voltage up to 2kV 2 kV 11 Supply obtained from output
voltage
Not used 12 Not used
Output voltage up to 4kV 13 In preparation
Signal output, cable monitor module - CH1 - 14 Current interface signal -
(10mA)
Signal output, cable monitor module + CH1 + 15 Current interface signal +
(10mA)
Cable with a solid wire thickness of 1x4 mm2 or 1x2.5 mm2 stranded with wire-end 2x 1.5 mm2 or
stranded with wire-end ferrules according to DIN 46 220 can be connected.
Explanation:
Terminal (1): Traction earth
Terminal (4,5): Screen connection, terminals are connected together internally.
Terminal (7): Screen feedback input (FB=Feedback) e.g. two feeder cables wired
in parallel.
Terminal (10): Conductor connection for feeder voltages up to 1 kV
Terminal (11): Conductor connection for feeder voltages up to 2 kV
Terminal (13): Conductor connection for feeder voltages up to 4 kV (in preparation)
Terminal (14,15): Interface connection for the measurement transfer to the buffer am-
plifier.
The cable monitor module measures the cable insulation resistances. The serial interface lies at
traction potential above the buffer amplifier. Potential isolation is provided by the buffer amplifier.

DANGER
The signal output CH1 of the cable monitor module carries traction voltage.

VT39DR Page 45 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

/ %XVEDU

Supply from protective unit


4 7HVWVKXQW

22 23 '&EXIIHUDPSOLILHU
- + E10433-E9709-H200
UEIP 2
+24V
25 3

+
0V
± 300mV

UEI
1
6KXQW 27

-
± 10V COM 15

UEU
29 LINK UEI / mV UAI / V
14
15 - 14 60 10
max. +/- 4000 V
15 - 13 90 10 13
(Terminal 15) 20 15 - 12 150 10
+ 12
CH1 - 300 10
19 -
Optical fibre cable
17
+ INV 11
CH2
16 - UAU UTest UAI
6HFWLRQRXWSXW max.±10V/20mA ±10V max.±10V/20mA
0V 0V 0V

10
4

9
7

6
Analogue outputs for measurement instruments

Feeder cable
&DEOHPRQLWRUPRGXOH 9ROWDJHGLYLGHUPRGXOH
15
12 15 4000V
< 4000V
11 CH1 + 14
< 2000V -
10
10 2000V
< 1000V
4
E10439-E9700-H201

Screen 6
5 Screen 1000V

Contact line
E10439-E9511-

7 3
FB 10V
H100

2
0V
1
0V
1
0V

Track L-

Fig 11: Block diagram of buffer amplifier with voltage divider module and cable monitor module (cable moni-
toring without screen interruption).

SITRAS DPU96 Page 46 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

Screen monitoring
Screen monitoring can be carried out with two circuit variants:

L+

Feeder cable
&DEOHPRQLWRUPRGXOH

12 15
< 4000V
11 CH1 + 14
< 2000V -
10
< 1000V
5

E10439-E9700-H201
1,12 MOhm Screen
4
Screen
Contact line 7
FB

1
0V

Track L-

Fig. 12: Circuit with a termination resistance.

Fig. 12 shows the circuit with a termination resistance of 1.12 MΩ on the end of the cable. This
resistance is calculated during the insulation measurement. If the insulation resistance exceeds
1.12 MΩ, then an interruption in the screen has occurred.

L+
Feeder cable

&DEOHPRQLWRUPRGXOH

12 15
< 4000V
11 CH1 + 14
< 2000V -
10
< 1000V
4
E10439-E9700-H201

Screen
5
Screen
Contact line 7
FB

1
0V

Track L-

Fig. 13: Circuit with an even number of parallel cables without termination resistance.

Fig. 13 shows the circuit with an even number of parallel cables with the screens being connected
together at the end of the cable. The cable screen fed back is wired to the FB input.

VT39DR Page 47 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

 'SQQMWWMSRMRK

WARNING
The switchgear carries a dangerous electrical voltage. Non-observance of the direc-
tions contained in these operating instructions can result in death, severe personal in-
jury or considerable damage to the equipment.
Safe operation of the switchgear requires that it has been commissioned by qualified
personnel observing the warning remarks in these operating instructions.
In particular, not only the applicable installation and safety instructions for work on
heavy current systems (e.g. DIN, VDE, IEC, EN) but also the regulations regarding to
the proper use of tools and personal safety equipment (safety goggles, etc.) should be
observed.
All work on the switchgear and its installation must be carried out in conformance with
national regulations and local regulations. This includes making sure that the unit is
properly earthed so that no freely accessible part of the unit can be at network or any
other dangerous voltage.
Work on the unit when in operation may only be carried out by suitably qualified per-
sonnel.
Use only measuring equipment that you know is functionally and operationally safe.
These instructions do not contain a complete list of measures required for the safe op-
eration of the switchgear. Further measures may be necessary for special applications
or operating conditions. Should special problems arise which are not dealt with ade-
quately for the purposes of the purchaser, please contact your local Siemens company.

 'EPMFVEXMSREJXIVMRMXMEPW[MXGLSR
The unit can be reset before calibration with Parameter [150] Initialize. This sets all parameters to
their default values.

NOTE
Execution of the function with YES deletes all user settings.

[150] Initialize: If this parameter is confirmed, then all parameters except the pass-
word and access level are set to their default values. The measure-
ment, event and alarm memories are deleted. A list of default values
can be found in Chap. 11.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 48 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

IMPORTANT
After booting, the parameters are set to values which make the unit sensitive in re-
sponse with, under some circumstances, rapid tripping, i.e. normal operating condi-
tions may lead to tripping.

During commissioning of the unit, the protective unit must be matched to the shunt and the tap-
ping of the voltage divider module.

NOTE
The information for the correct setting may be taken from the relevant circuit docu-
mentation.

For this, the following parameters are set:


[20] Shunt: Conversion of the output current measured value for internal calcula-
tion.
Example: Shunt: 3000A /60mV
Setting: [20] =3000A/60mV = 50A/mV
[21] Voltage divider: Conversion of the output voltage measured value for internal calcula-
tion.
Example: Rated voltage Urated = 750V
=> Tapping on voltage divider module 1000V
Setting: [21] = Voltage divider tapping/10V = 100
[715] Test shunt: Conversion of the test current measured value for internal calculation
(only needed for option Test current measurements with residual re-
sistance determination).
Example: Shunt: 60A /60mV
Setting: [715] =60A/60mV = 1A/mV
[152] Offset comp. : Here offset voltages are compensated which originate from the buf-
fer amplifier. The offset compensation must be carried out with no
voltage or current on the output, i.e. the offset compensation can
only be carried out with the circuit breaker switched off (checkback
signal CB OFF).

VT39DR Page 49 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Installation and commissioning

NOTE
The parameter reactions must be set depending on the operating conditions of the
section feeder panels.

 %MHWMRGSQQMWWMSRMRKXLIGEFPIQSRMXSVQSHYPI

5.2.2.1 Cable measurement function test


The Parameter [312] Cable 1: Measurement gives you quick information of whether the system is
working correctly. If the system has been connected correctly, the left number of the parameter
should increase after each successful measurement. However, if only the right number increases,
there is still a problem present. Twisted cable for the serial link between the cable monitor module
and the buffer is detected and signalled by the system.

5.2.2.2 Function test for screen monitoring with termination resistance


The screen monitoring variant with termination resistance offers the possibility of testing the
measurement circuit at any time (see page 47, Fig. 11). Parameter [320] Screen mon. is be set at
off for this. Now the termination resistance is no longer calculated during the computation of the
insulation resistance, so that a resistance value from the parallel circuit of the termination resis-
tance and the insulation resistance is produced. With new cables this almost corresponds to the
termination resistance. When a resistance value becomes established after a few measurements,
this indicates that the resistance is connected and the measurement circuit is operating correctly.
If the measured value does not become established, then there is a suspicion that the termination
resistance is not connected correctly.
To carry out a trip test, Parameter [308] Cable 1: R(S-W)min must now be set to a value higher
than the termination resistance. If the measurement falls below this set value, tripping follows.

 7[MXGLMRKSRERHSJJHYVMRKSTIVEXMSR
After switch-on the device carries out a self-test.
The date and time are retained after switching off and continue after switching on.
After each switch-on the operating clock must be reset to the date and time, unless you are using
the time synchronisation options via the Profibus.
On switch-off the unit saves all the parameters in the EEPROM and the data is retained.
This means that the correct sequence of events is saved in the event memory.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 50 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 *YRGXMSRERH3TIVEXMSR

 7-86%7(4949'IRXVEP9RMX

 3TIVEXMRKTVMRGMTPIW

Contrast Change keys Acknowledge key Cursor key

Fig. 14: Membrane keypad and LCD display

The central unit is operated with a membrane keypad. Data is displayed on an LCD display. The
display can show four lines of up to 16 Latin or Chinese characters each. The display has LED
background illumination. The contrast is adjusted with the Contrast keys.
Information is displayed structured in windows (main groups) which are in turn assigned function-
specific windows (subgroups). A certain part of the total information can be accessed via the rele-
vant window. The display and the windows are subdivided into two parts:
• System bar: The number and name of the currently displayed window is situated in the sys-
st
tem bar (1 line of the display). The system bar is present in all windows.

nd th
Display area: The display-dependent part data is shown in the display area (2 to 4 lines in the
display). It is subdivided into various fields. The meaning of the individual fields is explained in
the following chapters.

VT39DR Page 51 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

'LVSOD\QDPH

3DUDPHWHU
3DUDPHWHU
QDPH
YDOXH

3DUDPHWHU

EORFN 3DUDPHWHU

QXPPHU

3DUDPHWHUW\SH 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ

Fig. 15: Window parameters

       

2SHUDWLRQ 'LVSOD\V (YHQW 6\VWHPGDWD 3URWHFWLYH &RQWURO 352),%86 'LDJQRVLV

PHPRU\ IXQFWLRQV

1.1 2.1 3.1 4.1 5.1 6.1 7. 8.1


Operation Meas. value History Basic data I max Test method PROFIBUS Start up

4.2 6.2
1.2 2.2 3.2 5.2 8.2
Protective Test
Operation Peak value Trip delta I I/O test
reaction

4.3 6.3
1.3 2.3 3.3 5.3 8.3
I/O Times
Operation Power System ind. di/dt Service
assignment

3.4 4.4 5.4 6.4


1.4 2.4 8.4
Switching Group DMT/ Limits
Operation Counters Analysis
operations message Umin/Umax

5.5 6.5
1.5 2.5 3.5
Cable State
Feeder Switch load Warning
temperature

5.6
Cable
insulation

5.7
Cable screen

Explanation:
0DLQJURXS
Subgroup only visible with appropriate options

Fig. 16: Diagram of main groups and subgroups

There are the following eight main groups:


1. Operation: Display of operating values
2. Displays: Viewing of display parameters
3. Event memory: Display of entries in event memory
4. System data: Display and setting of system configuration parameters
5. Protective functions: Display and setting of protective function parameters
6. Control: Display and setting of control function parameters
7. Profibus: Display and setting of Profibus function parameters
8. Diagnosis: Display and setting of diagnosis function parameters

You can select the system bar and therefore the various windows in the main group with the cur-
sor keys and . You obtain access to the subgroups with the keys  /  . Here you will find vari-

SITRAS DPU96 Page 52 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

ous parameters, each of which saves part of the total information. The parameters are in turn sub-
divided into setting and observing parameters. A more detailed explanation of the parameters is
given in Chap. 6.1.2 from page 54.
A change to the setting parameters can be carried out as follows (a selected field is always shown
in inverse):
Example:
1. Selection of Main group 5 (5. Protective functions)

  

6\VWHPGDWD 3URWHFWLYH &RQWURO

IXQFWLRQV

4.1 5.1 6.1


Basic data I max Test method
+ -
4.2 5.2 6.2
Protective delta I Test
reaction
+ -
4.3 6.3
5.3
I/O Times
di/dt
assignment

4.4 5.4 6.4


Group DMT/ Limits
message Umin/Umax

5.5 6.5
Cable State
temperature

5.6
Cable
insulation

5.7
Cable screen

2. Selection of the required subgroup with the  /  keys (e.g. 5.3 di/dt)

3. Mark the parameter names with (2nd line from the top in the display).

VT39DR Page 53 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

4. Skip to the required parameter in the subgroup with (e.g. di/dt:Duration No. 102)

5. Mark the displayed figure (incl. unit) with .

6. Set the desired value (e.g. 40ms) with the keys  /  and accept the change with the
Acknowledge key .

NOTE
If the  /  keys are held pressed, an automatic repeat function switches on after two
seconds. The adjustment speed increases the longer the key is pressed.
For numerical entries you can select and change the complete number with the  / 
keys or individual places with the cursor key or . Switching options (e.g. ON/OFF)
are always shown in plain text.

 4EVEQIXIVW

 7XVYGXYVI
The complete system information is saved in parameters and secured against data loss in
EEPROMs.

 4EVEQIXIVHMWTPE]
The parameters are used to change device settings or view values. There are two different types
of parameters.
• Observing parameters (BP) indicate operating states or actual values. Observing parameters
cannot be changed and saved by the operator. A parameter number, name and exactly one
variable are assigned to each observing parameter.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 54 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

• Setting parameters (EP) have values which can be changed. For each parameter there is an
internal parameter number, a multi-lingual name and exactly one value. If you confirm the pa-
rameter, the parameter is immediately saved.

There are three access levels with which the access to the parameters is set.
• Observe (BEO): Access to the most important observing parameters and necessary setting
parameters (e.g. access level).
• Standard (STA): Additional access to the setting and observing parameters which are needed
for the general protection settings and maintenance.
• Expert (EXP): Access to all parameters. This access level is only intended for appropriately
qualified personnel.

The unit is parameterised using the following:


• Membrane keypad on the central unit
• SITRAS DPU96 SW: PC Application Software

'LVSOD\QDPH

3DUDPHWHU
3DUDPHWHU
QDPH
YDOXH
3DUDPHWHU

EORFN 3DUDPHWHU

QXPEHU

3DUDPHWHU 'HIDXOWVHWWLQJ

W\SH

Fig. 17: Window parameters

The subparameters can be set via the individual fields:


• Parameter name: Each parameter has a parameter name. If this field is selected, you can page
between the parameters with the or keys. The parameter names cannot be changed.
• Parameter value: Value of the parameter. When this field is selected, you can adjust the pa-
rameter value. The set value is accepted by pressing the Acknowledge key . Then the pa-
rameter name field is automatically selected. This indicates to the operator that the saving has
terminated successfully. Observing parameters are continually updated.
• Parameter block: You can save two different protection settings (Protection parameters [88] to
[138]) for operation. You can switch over between the first and second settings in the parame-
ter block field. With parameters which only occur once the symbol G for global appears here.
The field cannot then be edited.
• Parameter type: This field indicates whether a setting parameter (EP) or an observing parame-
ter (BP) is involved. The field is only used for information and cannot be changed. If the field
shows the label (RO, read only), then a setting parameter is involved which cannot be
changed at this access level. This function enables parameters to be checked without having
to change to the necessary access level.
• Parameter number: You can also select the parameters based on an unambiguous parameter
number. The parameter numbers are arranged in areas.
(A complete list of parameters is given in Chap. 11).
• Default setting: A default setting is assigned internally to each parameter when the digital pro-
tective unit is first switched on. By selecting and confirming this field the default setting is

VT39DR Page 55 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

copied into the field for the parameter value and this field activated. You must acknowledge
this with the Acknowledge key to save the setting.

 4EVEQIXIVEGGIWW
Access to the parameters can be obtained via the central unit, the PC user software or via the
PROFIBUS communication interface for selected control parameters. Access rights are controlled
via the operator’s Access rights. (See Chap. 6.1.2.2 from page 54).
Of the parameter blocks only the variable value can be changed, assuming that the parameter is a
setting parameter, the operator is at the correct access level and the device has writing rights.
The parameter description saved in the central unit is binding for all connected devices, i.e. it is
always called from the central unit.
Quick search of parameters
In order to be able to quickly find a known parameter, there is the possibility of changing the pa-
rameter number at the lower right of the display. By accepting this parameter number the unit
immediately displays the required parameter in the associated subgroup.

Fig 18: Change parameter number

6.1.2.4 Parameter blocks


Important protection parameters which relate to the section conditions occur twice: Parameter
block 1 and Parameter block 2. These can be switched over. The active parameter block is used by
the digital protective unit for the protection monitoring.
All other parameters only occur once.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 56 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[P132] Copy [P131]


[E21;X2:52]
parameter block Parameter
Terminal
block operation

Protection para-
meters block 1
[P90]...[P138]

Protection para-
meters block 2
[P90]...[P138]
Digital Protective
Unit

Other
parameters

Fig. 19: Function of the two parameter blocks for the protection parameters

There are the following parameters for the parameter block selection:
[130] Parblock curr: This parameter indicates which parameter block is currently selected.
[131] Parblock oper.: The parameter block selected here is used for the running operation.
There is the settings Block 1, 2, for a fixed assignment or the selec-
tion “Terminal” for the selection between Parameter blocks 1 and 2
via the digital input.
Example: Block 1 is selected in Fig. 19.
[132] Copy parblock: The copy direction is selected (from Parameter block 1 to 2 or vice
versa). On confirming the parameter, the contents of one parameter
block are copied to the other.

 ;MRHS[%GXMSR
The following window shows the structure of the window Action using a trip as an example:

$FWLRQ

7ULS

FULWHULRQ
$FNQRZOHGJH

ILHOG
7ULSYDOXH

Fig. 20: Window Action

If a warning, trip or system signal occurs, the normal window is replaced by the Action window
which is displayed for at least 5 seconds.

VT39DR Page 57 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

You can change back to a different window at any time via the system bar. If however no opera-
tion occurs for 10 seconds, then the Action window is displayed again.
The various events have different display priorities and are displayed accordingly.
• General warning: Warnings are displayed until the cause of the warning has been rectified.
With a number of warnings, the last warning is always displayed.
• Trip or system message: With a trip or system message the Action window always displays
this until it is acknowledged. If a number of unacknowledged trips or system messages exist,
the latest system message is always displayed. The Action window is only removed when no
unacknowledged trips or system messages are present.
• Action windows with warnings are overwritten. A new warning is displayed for five seconds
with an unacknowledged trip or system message.

You can acknowledge a system message or trip via the field QUIT (not present for warnings). The
value which caused the message is always displayed with the relevant units without post-decimal
places.

 3TIVEXMRKWXEXIW
The operating state of the unit can be read in the display.
You can obtain this information about the parameter [151] Operating status via other sources (e.g.
the PC user program or the communications).
The protective unit can assume the following operating states:
• Operation of the normal operating state for the protective unit.
• Event
— System message with corresponding message in the display
— Trip with corresponding message in the display
— Warning with corresponding message in the display.
— Switching actions with corresponding entry in the event memory.

 7EZMRKQIXLSHW
The unit uses various methods of saving such as
• Event memory
• Alarm memory
• Measurement memory

 )ZIRXQIQSV]

(QHUJ\VWRUH 2XWSXW
7ULSSLQJV
Event identifier
6\VWHPPHVVDJHV Ring buffer
Event value
 records
6ZLWFKLQJRSHUDWLRQV Event date
Event memory

Fig. 21: Principle of the event memory

SITRAS DPU96 Page 58 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

The entries in the event memory are subdivided into three types of events:
Trips: Tripping of the DC breaker due to activation of the definite-time over-
current time protection (UMZ), Umin monitoring, Umax monitoring, Imax
monitoring, ∆I monitoring, di/dt monitoring, cable insulation monito-
ring or the cable temperature monitoring.
System messages: Events from central unit control routines.
Switching actions: Changes to the system state due to the operating sequence. Events
in section testing and automation signals (e.g. CB ON).
The event memory is a ring buffer with 1000 records. The last 1000 events can always be ac-
cessed. The event memory is buffered so that contents are not lost during a voltage failure.
The following data are saved for each event:
• Event code
• Event value
• Event date
• Event time

You can evaluate the event memory record on the unit via the windows of the main group 3.
Event memory with the selectable subgroups (3.1 Events, 3.2 Tripping, 3.3 System messages, 3.4
Switching operations) for the relevant types of event.
You read out the event memory records also via parameters in the main group 8. Diagnosis, sub-
group 8.4 Analysis.

6.1.5.2 Alarm memory

$ODUPPHPRU\ 2XWSXW

Warning type
:DUQLQJV Ring puffer Warning value
 records Warning date
Warning time

Fig. 22: Principle of the alarm memory

The alarm memory is separate from the event memory because warning events can occur very
frequently (warning thresholds set very low). The warning events would soon fill the event mem-
ory, preventing a long-term reconstruction of the system conditions.
The alarm memory has a capacity of 256 warning records. It is organised in a ring buffer like the
event memory and its contents are retained when the supply voltage fails.
The following data is saved for each warning:
• Warning code
• Warning date
• Warning time

You can evaluate the alarm memory on the unit via the window for the main group 3. Event mem-
ory in selectable subgroup (3.5 Warnings).

VT39DR Page 59 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

The alarm memory records can also be read out via parameters in the main group 8. Diagnosis,
subgroup 8.4 Analysis.

 1IEWYVIQIRXQIQSV]

0HDVXUHPPHPRU\

8190Byte
I 819ms

t
&XUUHQW 2XWSXW
0HDVXUHPPHPRU\

8190Byte

I 819ms

10ms
... 0HPRU\HQG
750ms

Normal
Hold
Stop 0HPRU\PRGH
Oszilloscope

Warning
Trip
0HPRU\HYHQW

Fig. 23: Principle of the measurement memory

The current trace can be analysed after a warning or trip. To do this, the current trace is also re-
corded. The contents of the memory are also retained even after a voltage failure using a buffer.
The Parameter [71] Memory event defines whether the recording is stopped after a warning or a
trip.
Every 100µs the protective unit acquires a measurement. Each measurement memory saves 8190
measurements. This gives a recording time of 819ms.
The following parameters are located in the main group 4. System data in the selectable subgroup
(4.1 Basic data).
[71] Memory event : Determines whether a warning or a trip stops the recording of the
measurement memory. The measurement memory is only triggered
for warnings or trips that are triggered by the protective functions for
the current. Saving also occurs when the trigger has been inhibited.
[72] Memory mode: With this parameter you can set how the measurement memory is
treated after recording.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 60 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

With the Normal memory mode a saved measurement trace can be


written again even if it has not yet been evaluated. The memory al-
ways contains the recording of the last trip. So that the current trace
can be analysed for the trip or warning, the measurement memory
must not be written with the present values. The present current tra-
ce is written to a second measurement memory. If a trip or warning
occurs again, then the second memory is blocked and the first me-
mory overwritten.
If the memory mode is set to Hold, then once a recording of a mea-
surement trace has been saved, it is protected against being
overwritten.
With Stop memory mode the recording of the present measurement
memory is stopped. The momentary current trace can be read out for
analysis. A trip in this memory mode results in the stopping of the
measurement memory and the second memory is then overwritten.
In the Oscilloscope memory mode the current trace for the present
measurement memory is output continuously. Since it is not possible
to transfer all measurements via the PC interface in the Oscilloscope
mode, an appropriate sampling rate must be set.
[73] Sampling rate: With this parameter you set how many measurements are recorded
in the oscilloscope mode. This makes a zoom function possible.
th
Example: With a setting “10000” each 10,000 100µs measurement
is saved (i.e. every second). This gives the possibility of recording
long-term current traces.
[74] Memory end: With a warning or trip (depending on [71] Memory event), recording
is continued up to the end of memory, so that the memory prehistory
and post-history are contained. The parameter Memory end determi-
nes the length of the post-history. The total time amounts to 819ms
(does not apply to the Oscilloscope memory mode).

VT39DR Page 61 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Function as...
Memory mode: 1RUPDO

\
U
R
P
H
P

U
H
V
0 0 0
8
is actual is actual is actual

V
H
Y
L
K 0 0 0
F
U is empty t1 values t2 values
$

t
t1 t2
1st tripping or warning 2nd tripping or warning

Function as...
Memory mode: +ROG

\
U
R
P
H
P

U
H
V
8 0 0 0

is actual is actual is actual

V
H
Y
L
K 0 0 0
F
U is empty t1 values t1 values
$

t
t1 t2
1st tripping or warning 2nd tripping or warning

Legends:

0
Measurement memory 1

0
Measurement memory 2

Fig. 24: Operating principle of the memory modes Normal and Hold

SITRAS DPU96 Page 62 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Function as...
Memory mode: 6WRS

\
U
R
P
H
P

U
H
V
0 0
8
is actual is actual

V
H
Y
L
K 0 0
F
U is empty t1 values
$

t1 t
2XWSXWRIW YDOXHV


Function as...
Memory mode: 2V]LOORVFRSH

H
G
R
P

\
U
R
P
H 0 0
0
is actual is actual

V
H
Y
L
K 0 0
F
U is empty is empty
$

t1 t
Output of momentary values at selected
VDPSOLQJUDWH

Legends:

0
Measurement memory 1

0
Measurement memory 2

Fig. 25: Operating principle of the memory modes Stop and Oscilloscope

VT39DR Page 63 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

You can also read out the measurement memory via parameters in the main group 8. Diagnosis,
subgroup 8.4 Analysis.

 (MWTPE][MRHS[W

1. Operation
An operating window is visible in normal operation on the display of the protective unit. There a
total of five windows. Three parameters are displayed in each window.
1.1 Operation: Ithav, Imax, Umin
1.2 Operation: Ithav, Imax, Uact
1.3 Operation: Ithav, Imax, Auto stat.
1.4 Operation: Ithav, Iact, Uact
1.5 Feeder: Auto stat, Time, Cycles (Feeder control displays)
The last selected operating display is retained.
Example:

3DUDPHWHUV 9DOXHV

Fig. 26: Operation window

Parameter definition:
I thav: The mean load of the output current in the time window of variable
length. The length can be set with Parameter [15].
I max: Maximum value of output current occurred so far.
U min: Minimum value of output voltage occurred so far.
U act: Momentary value of section output voltage.
I act: Momentary value of section output current.
Auto stat.: Automation status
Time: Total time of last test run.
Cycles: Number of tests.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 64 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

2. Displays
2.1 Measurements
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
1 I act A BP BEO Updates the value of the section output current 3 times per second.
2 U act V BP BEO Updates the value of the section output voltage 3 times per second.
3 ϑcable actual °C BP BEO Updates the calculated cable temperature in °C 3 times per second.
4 _ϑcable actual °F BP BEO Updates the calculated cable temperature in °F 3 times per second.
98 ∆I act A BP STA Updates the momentary current step change in a time window of 10 ms 3
times per second.
103 di/dt act A/ms BP STA Updates the momentary current slope in a time window of 10 ms 3 times
per second.
16 I rms A BP BEO Momentary rms value of the output current which is calculated in the time
window “[17]Time basis I rms ” (access expert).
25 I thav A BP BEO Momentary mean load of output current which is calculated in the time
window “[15] Time display” (access expert).
130 Parblock curr. BP BEO Displays the protection parameter block which is currently being used by
the unit for the protection functions.
151 Operating status BP EXP Displays the operating state in which the unit is working (Operation, warn-
ing or system message)

These parameters can be displayed in the subgroup 2.1 Measurements. Some parameters then
no longer appear on the unit depending on the basic device settings, (e.g. Parameters 3 or 4 are
only visible in this subgroup due to the default setting of the temperature unit in Parameter [109].
2.2 Peak values
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
26 I max A BP BEO Shows the maximum occurring feeder current. The value can be reset via
“[14] Max/min delete” (access expert).
27 I max r A BP BEO Shows the maximum occurring return current. The value can be reset via
“[14] Max/min delete” (access expert).
28 U min V BP BEO Minimum occurring output voltage. The value can be reset via “[14]
Max/min delete” (access expert).
29 U max V BP BEO Maximum occurring output voltage. The value can be reset via “[14]
Max/min delete” (access expert).

These peak values are found during acquisition of peak values and always updated when a peak
value is exceeded. These peak values can be deleted by the Parameter [14].

VT39DR Page 65 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

2.3 Power
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
400 Traction energy kWh BP BEO Sum of extracted energy
401 Energy recovery kWh BP BEO Sum of recovered energy.
402 Feeder power kW BP BEO Mean of extracted power over the set time of Parameter [404].
403 Power recovery kW BP BEO Mean of recovered power over the set time of Parameter [404].

These parameters only appear with appropriately enabled option (see Chap. 6.1.2.4, page 56).

2.4 Counters
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
5 Trip counter 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of all trips.
6 Trip count. Imax 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of the I max trips.
7 Trip count. ∆I 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of ∆I trips.
8 Trip count. di/dt 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of di/dt trips.
9 Trip count. temp 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of thermal trips.
11 Trip count. UMZ 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of UMZ trips.
12 Operation coun- 1 BP BEO Accumulative count of switching operations.
ter

These figures are a listing of the counts acquired by the unit.

2.5 Switch load


No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
13 Total current kA BP BEO- Sum of all switched-off currents. Reset by Parameter [19].
37 Breaking current A BP BEO The last switched-off current.

These switch load parameters only appear with the appropriately enabled option (see Chap. 6.3.5,
page 170).

SITRAS DPU96 Page 66 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

3. Event memory
3.1 History
This window displays the records in the event buffer in chronological order.

7ULSSLQJ

FULWHUDWLRQ (YHQWWLPH

(YHQWGDWH

(YHQWLQGH[LQ

HYHQWEXIIHUVWRUH

(YHQWYDOXH $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW

LQGLFDWLRQ

Fig. 27: Events window

In this window all entries are shown which are saved in the event memory.

3.2 Trip

7ULSSLQJ

FULWHULRQ (YHQWWLPH

(YHQWGDWH
(YHQWLQGH[LQ

HYHQWEXIIHUVWRUH

(YHQWYDOXH $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW

LQGLFDWLRQ

Fig. 28: Trip window

This window shows all tripping events which are saved in the event memory.
The trip criterion (Imax), event value (2010 A), event date (10.06.1998) and event time (10:34:16) are
shown. At the lower right there is a numerical field which displays the momentary index (9) in the
event memory. You can page through the trip events with the  /  keys. If there is no trip event at
the selected point, then the next trip event found is displayed. The field Q shows whether the trip
has been acknowledged.

3.3 System ind.


In this window system events are displayed which have been saved in the event memory. The
display and operation is as for the trip window.

3.4 Switch op.


In this window switching operations are displayed which have been saved in the event memory.
The display and operation is as for the trip window.

VT39DR Page 67 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

3.5 Warning
This window only shows the warnings in the warning buffer.

7ULSSLQJ

FULWHUDWLRQ (YHQWWLPH

(YHQWGDWH
(YHQWLQGH[LQ

HYHQWEXIIHUVWRUH

(YHQWYDOXH $FNQRZOHGJHPHQW

LQGLFDWLRQ

Fig. 29: Warning window

In this window warning events are displayed which have been saved in the alarm memory.
The warning criterion, warning value, warning date (10.06.1998) and the warning time (10:07:12)
are displayed. You can page through the warning events with the  /  keys. If there is no warning
event at the selected point, then the next warning event found is displayed. The field Q indicates
whether the trip has been acknowledged. The acknowledgement occurs automatically after quit-
ting the warning criterion.

4. System data windows


All basic system and protective function settings are carried out under system data windows.
4.1 Basic data
The parameters for basic data can be found under the main group 4.System data windows with
the subgroup 4.1 Basic data. The basic data is provided with a default setting for initial operation.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 68 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Type Access Brief description


level
15 Time display S EP STA Sets the length of the time window in which the loading mean for the
output current “[25] I thav“ is formed.
17 Time basis I rms s EP EXP Sets the length of the time window in which the rms value of the trac-
tion current “[16] I rms“ is formed.
20 Shunt A/mV EP EXP Replication of the traction current measurement for internal calculation
( e.g.: 60mV at IN -> [20] = IN/60 ).
21 Voltage divider V/V EP EXP Replication of the traction voltage measurement for internal calculation
( e.g.:10V at UN -> [21] = UN/10 ).
22 Analog output - EP EXP Output for processor-internal signals for output to the analogue output.
23 Gain analog out 1 EP EXP Integer gain of the output signal before being presented on the ana-
logue output.
71 Memory event - EP EXP Setting of whether a warning or a trip stops the measurement memory.
72 Memory mode - EP EXP Normal=Memory always contains last trip;
Hold=Memory is only written once;
Stop=Memory contains momentary current trace;
Oscilloscope=Memory continually outputs momentary current trace
(corresponds to oscillograph function)
73 Sampling rate - EP EXP Zooming in the oscilloscope memory mode.
74 Memory end ms EP EXP Time of how long the measurement memory continues to record after a
trip.
109 Temp. unit EP EXP Selection of whether temperatures are displayed in °C or °F.
140 Set time - EP STA Sets the current time.
141 Set date - EP STA Sets the current date.
145 Change pass- - EP STA Defines a password.
word
147 Language - EP BEO Selects the menu language.
149 Baud rate PC - EP EXP Baud rate setting for connection to a PC.
169 Enable warnings - EP EXP Inhibits or enables all warnings. Warnings can then be rendered ineffec-
tive.
188 Device identifier - EP EXP Displays the device number.
189 Buffer amplifier - BP EXP Displays the recognised buffer amplifier.
404 Timebase power - EP EXP Gives the time interval for the power measurement.
700 Feeder control - EP STA Switches on feeder control and automatic test and reclose (Option
section feeder control).
711 Feeder type - EP EXP Selects the drive as permanent magnetic / electromagnetic
Permanent magnetic: Drive via pulse
Electromagnetic: Hold signal (A10 and drive pulse for economy contac-
tor)
715 Test shunt A/mV EP EXP Measured test current of last test (option residual resistance detection).

[15] Time display Determines the length of the time window for the formation of the
mean loading display, adjustable from 1 second to 24 hours (86400 s)
in a resolution of one second.
[20] Shunt: Replication of the output current measurement for internal calculation

VT39DR Page 69 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Example: Shunt: 3000A /60mV


Setting: [20] =3000A/60mV = 50A/mV
[21] Voltage divider: Replication of the output voltage measurement for internal calculati-
on.
Example: Rated voltage UN = 750V
Tapping on voltage divider module 1000V
Setting: [21] = Voltage divider tapping/10V = 100
[22] Analog. output: With this parameter you can select which device-internal value is to be
output on the analogue output Uout (±10V).
The replication scale of the parameterisable signals is as follows when the gain factor [P33] is set
at 1:
Signal designation Input values on the buffer amplifier As formed on analogue output.
Standardised current values Input UEI -60 mV 1.25 V
Ionstan; Iactstan; Irmsstan; Ithavstan 1mV 20.833 mV on analogue output.

Standardised voltage values Input UEU -10 V 1.25 V


Uonstan; Uactstan 1V 250 mV on analogue output.
(depends on voltage divider tapping)
Absolute current values 2 A 0.30517 mV
Ionabs; ∆Iactabs; ... 100 A 15.259 mV on analogue output.
Cable temperature 1º C 30.5175 mV on analogue output.

Absolute current values 2 A /ms 0.30517 mV


di/dtFilterabs;... 1oo A / ms 15.259 mV on analogue output.
Internal counter for acquisition 100 µs 0,30517 mV
1 s 3.0517 V on analogue output.
(sawtooth trace)
Internal operating system counter 10 ms 0.30517 mV
(sawtooth trace) on analogue output.

The output looks like this:

Uout = {Factor for analogue output [P23]} * replication value


Replication value = Current from shunt, voltage on output etc., values from table

Example 1: Ionstan is taken from a shunt 3000A/60mV. Then 60 mV input signal is


output as 1.25 V on the analogue output Uout. If now 3000A is to be
replicated as 10 V at Uout, the analogue output factor [P23] must be
set.
[P23] = 10V / 1.25 V = 8.

Example 2: Uonstan is taken from a circuit in the 1000V voltage divider module. The
buffer amplifier measures 10V = ±1000V. The 10 V of input signal are
output as 1.25 V on the analogue output Uout. If now 2000V is to be
replicated as 10 V at Uout, the analogue output factor [P23) must be
set.
[P23] = (1000V/2000V*10V )/ 1.25 V = 4.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 70 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[23] Gain analog out : Integer gain of selected value before output to the analogue output.
[72] Memory mode: With this parameter you can set how the measurement memory is
treated after recording.
With the Normal memory mode a saved measurement trace can be
written again even if it has not yet been evaluated. The memory al-
ways contains the recording of the last trip. So that the current trace
can be analysed for the trip or warning, the measurement memory
must not be written with the present values. The present current tra-
ce is written to a second measurement memory. If a trip or warning
occurs again, then the second memory is blocked and the first me-
mory overwritten.
If the memory mode is set to Hold, then once a recording of a mea-
surement trace has been saved, it is protected against being
overwritten.
With the Stop memory mode the recording of the present measure-
ment memory is stopped. The momentary current trace can be read
out for analysis. A trip in this memory mode results in the stopping of
the measurement memory and the second memory is then overwrit-
ten.
In the Oscilloscope memory mode the current trace for the present
measurement memory is output continuously. Since it is not possible
to transfer all measurements via the PC interface in the Oscilloscope
mode, an appropriate sampling rate must be set.
[73] Sampling rate: With this parameter you set how many measurements are recorded
in the oscilloscope mode. This makes a zoom function possible.
th
Example: With a setting “10000” each 10,000 100µs measurement
is saved (i.e. every second). This gives the possibility of recording
long-term current traces.
[74] Memory end: With a warning or trip (depending on [71] Memory event), recording
is continued up to the end of memory, so that the memory prehistory
and post-history are contained. The parameter Memory end determi-
nes the length of the post-history. The total time amounts to 819ms
(does not apply to the Oscilloscope memory mode).
[109] Temp. unit: Selects whether the temperature parameter is displayed in °C or °F.
This setting is made in the subgroup 4.1 Basic data. The parameter
entries are automatically converted from °C to °F and vice versa.
[145] Change password: A new password, which must be confirmed when changing the
access level using the parameter [P144], can be entered with this pa-
rameter.

NOTE
Please take special note of the changed password. A change of access level is only
possible with the password.

[147] Language: Sets the language for the display output.

VT39DR Page 71 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[149] Baud rate PC: Sets the baud rate for connection to a PC.
[169] Enable warnings: Parameter for inhibiting or enabling all warnings.
[188] Device identifier: This function displays the device identifier (unambiguous device identifica-
tion).
[404] Timebase power: Time interval for forming the power mean.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 minute, Min: 1, Max: 1440, Default: 15min.
(Parameters in subgroup 4.1 Basic data)
[700] Section control: Selection parameter switch on/off circuit for feeder control function
setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
After switching on the feeder control all other parameters appear.
[711] Feeder type: Selection parameter for driving the feeder breaker. Setting parame-
ter, AP: Expert, Selection
Depending on the selection, control is either by pulse or via pulse or
a holding circuit. (Permanent magnetic or electrically held circuit bre-
aker).

NOTE
With the option Test current detection / Residual resistance measurement, the fol-
lowing Parameter [715] must be set.

[715] Test shunt : Replication of the test current measurement for internal calculation.
Example: Shunt: 60A /60mV
Setting: [715] = 60A/60mV => 1A/mV
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection

SITRAS DPU96 Page 72 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

4.2 Protective reaction


All basic settings for the protection functions are set in this display window.
The reaction of the unit to the detection of a trip or a system signal can be influenced by the fol-
lowing parameters.
No. Name Unit Type Ac- Brief description
cess
level
80 Action trip - EP EXP Defines whether the exceeding of a trip criterion causes a trip or whether
only a message appears (only applies to current trips, temp. excess still
leads to trip).
81 Action sys. sig- - EP EXP Defines whether a system signal causes a trip or only a message appears
nal
83 Trip contact - EP EXP For a normally closed contact, with a trip the 24V output switches to 0V
level or for a normally open contact to 24V.
84 Trip 250V DC - EP EXP This parameter is used to set whether the capacitor trip (250V DC) is used.
85 Current direction - EP EXP Defines which current direction (positive/ negative /bipolar) causes a trip.
86 Respons block 1 - EP EXP After the breaker closes this causes a dead time of 200 ms if the section
part was already live before closure.
87 Respons block 2 - EP EXP Always causes a dead time of 200 ms after the breaker closes.
131 Parblock oper. - EP STA Selection of the parameter block for the protection parameters which the
unit is to use.
330 Reaction S-W EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).
331 Reaction S-E EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).
332 React screen EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
mon. trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).
333 Reaction meas- - EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
ure trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).

[80] Action trip: You can define whether the trip output is to be driven as reaction to
an infringement of the trip criterion.
This parameter is intended for commissioning and tests.

WARNING
The complete protective function of the unit can be switched off with this parameter!
After termination of all commissioning and set-up work, it must be ensured that this
parameter is set to trip again.

[81] Action sys.mess.: You can define whether the trip output is to be driven as reaction to a
system message. A prerequisite is that the reaction has not been
switched off with Parameter [80] Action trip.

VT39DR Page 73 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

NOTE
With the Message setting the operator must ensure that messages which occur are
analysed as quickly as possible (trouble-shooting).

300µs after the detection of the cause of the trip, the 24 V DC output and the 250 V DC thyristor
output are driven. The reaction of the 24 V DC trip output (CB OFF; Abbr.: A10; Terminal: X2:3) to
a trip can be influenced by the following parameters:
[83] Trip contact: You can switch the 24 V DC trip output between normally closed and
normally open contacts.
[83] NC contact: The 24 V DC trip output is active on the closed circuit principle. When
a trip occurs, an internal link is established to the device ground (Ima-
ximum 400mA).
[83] NO contact: The 24 V DC trip output is active in the open circuit principle. When a
trip occurs, an internal link is established to 24 V DC (Imaximum
400mA).
With the automatic system enabled the effect of the output is defined via the selection of the
feeder type [711].
The reaction of the 250 V DC capacitor trip output (CB OFF; Abbr. P5; Terminal: X1:4) to a trip can
be influenced by the following parameters:
[84] Trip 250 V DC: You can switch the 250 V DC capacitor trip output on/off with this
parameter.

WARNING
This parameter may only be set to ON when the output is connected, otherwise
SITRAS DPU 96 will send the fault message "Not ready"

The unit is used on the section feeder with current being able to flow in both directions. For the
protective function the magnitude of the current is always relevant. With the Parameter Current
direction you can link the trip to a defined current direction:
[85] Current direction: This is used to restrict the short-circuit trip to one current direction.
Here the following possibilities are permitted:
bipolar: Trip in both current directions
positive: Trip only for positive currents
negative: Trip only for negative currents
The protective functions Imax and Iumz can normally be set separa-
tely for both measurement directions and are not affected by this pa-
rameter.
An unwanted reaction of the monitoring to switching processes in the system (e.g. due to
switching in another feeder) can be prevented by the following two parameters:

SITRAS DPU96 Page 74 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[86] Respons block 1: Switches the voltage-dependent response block ON or OFF. If the
feeder is switched onto a line that is already live, the current is redi-
stributed. Very high current slopes can be reached.
With ON you activate a dead time of 200ms, which runs from swit-
ching onto a section which is already live. Then the protective func-
tion is automatically activated.
[87] Respons block 2: Switches the voltage-dependent response block ON or OFF. On clo-
sing onto a network with high switch-on currents, the protective de-
vice may also trip. With ON you activate a dead time of 200ms which
runs from switching onto a section. Thereafter, the protective func-
tion is automatically activated.
[131] Parblock oper.: The parameter block selected here is used for the running operation.
It gives the settings Blocks 1 and 2 for a fixed arrangement or the
value Terminal for the switchover between Parameter blocks 1 and 2
via the digital input: Block 1 is selected in Fig. 19 on page 57.
The following parameters are only visible with the cable monitor option:
[330] Reaction S-W : Selection parameter for dealing with an insulation fault between
screen and conductor. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection of
Message / Trip. For the Trip setting the breaker is tripped in addition
to the message and the section feeder is blocked.

[331] Reaction S-E : Selection parameter for dealing with an insulation fault between
screen and earth. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection of Mes-
sage / Trip. For the Trip setting the breaker is tripped in addition to
the message and the section feeder is blocked.
[332] React. screen mon. : Selection parameter for driving the screen monitor. Feeder breaker
setting parameters, AP: Expert, Selection without monitoring with
screen feedback, e.g. with parallel cables or via a defined termination
resistance at the end of the feeder line between screen and conduc-
tor with a value of approx. 1.2 MΩ.
[333] Reaction measure: Selection parameters for dealing with faults from measurement inter-
ference on the cable monitor module. Setting parameter, AP: Expert,
Selection Message / Trip. With the Trip setting the breaker is tripped
in addition to the message and the section feeder is blocked.
4.3 I/O assignment
Using parameters the inputs can be enabled according to a preassigned allocation of functions:

VT39DR Page 75 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Type Ac- Brief description


cess
level
722 Input I 16 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
723 Input I 17 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
724 Input I 18 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
725 Input I 19 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
726 Input I 20 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
727 Output O 5 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for this output.
728 Output O 9 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for this output.

[722] Input I 16: Selection parameter for using the variable input: Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection
Message : Message via Profibus
Open Direct 1: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 2: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 3: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 4: Tripping of section feeder
Open Autom. 1: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 2: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 3: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 4: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Precond. 1: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 2: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 3: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 4: Precondition signal must be present for test
Bypass disco.: Enable of bypass disconnector control (only for follo-
wing option)
Inp hand cra: Hand crank signal Open bypass disconnector not con-
nected (only for option Bypass disconnector interlocking and enable
(E10433-E9705-F003)
Open Block 1: Tripping of section feeder with blocking.
Open Block 2: Tripping of section feeder with blocking.
Cable 1 Enable: Enable signal for Cable Monitor Module 1
Cable 2 Enable: Enable signal for Cable Monitor Module 2
[723] Input I 17: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[724] Input I 18: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[725] Input I 19: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[726] Input I 20: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[727] Output O 5: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection]
Command PROFIB : Command via Profibus
Block bypass: Inhibit on bypass disconnector control (only for option

SITRAS DPU96 Page 76 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Bypass disconnector interlock and enable.


(E10433-E9705-F003)
Cable insulat: Cable insulation message
Warn cable te: Warning cable temperature
Warning: Group message warning
Cable R (S-W): Cable insulation fault screen-wire
Cable R (S-E): Cable insulation fault screen-earth
Cable meas.: Cable insulation measurement fault
Cable shld f.: Cable insulation fault screen break
Cable ind. trip: Trip by cable monitor module
Cable mess.: Warning message by cable monitor module
Umin: U<Umin: Feeder voltage lower than Umin
Umax: U>Umax: Feeder voltage higher than Umax
Block.: section is blocked.
[728] Output O 9: Selection parameter for using the variable output; Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [727]
4.4 Group message
In this window you set which messages in the group fault are included in the section panel con-
trol.
The following parameters can only be viewed in the option section control:

VT39DR Page 77 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
740 Overcurrent trip - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
741 M:∆I tripping - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
742 M:di/dt tripping - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
743 M: trip - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
cable ϑ
744 M:trip cable S-W - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
745 M:trip cable S-E - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
746 M:screen breaks - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
747 M:measurement - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
tr
748 M:frame fault - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
trip
749 M:sustained s c - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
750 M:close trouble - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
751 M:opening trou- - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
ble
752 M:MCB trip - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
753 M:CB trouble - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
754 M:feedb. fault - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
755 M:test cont. tr - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
756 M:truck trouble - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
757 M:transfer trip - EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
758 M:blocking trans EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
759 M:input E16 EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
760 M:input E17 EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
761 M:PROFIBUS EP EXP Setting of whether this message drives the output Group alarm (A1).
fault

[740] Overcurrent trip: This message occurs when the static trip or the Imax trip in the pro-
tection function trips the breaker. Selection parameter of whether
this fault should drive the group message. When the breaker closes
again, the fault message is acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP:
Expert, Selection On / Off.
[741] M: ∆I tripping: This message occurs when the ∆I trip in the protection function trips
the breaker. Selection parameter of whether this fault should drive
the group message. When the breaker closes again, the fault mes-
sage is acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On /
Off.
[742] M: di/dt tripping: This message occurs when the di/dt trip in the protection function
trips the breaker. When the breaker closes again, the fault message
is acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 78 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[743] M: trip cable ϑ : This message occurs when the temperature trip in the protection
function trips the breaker. Reclosure is only possible after cooling to a
temperature below the limits of the trip temperature minus the hy-
steresis. When the breaker closes again, the fault message is
acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[744] M: trip cable S-W : This message occurs as a result of a trip due to an insulation fault
screen-wire. The breaker remains blocked, until a CB-off command
cancels the blocking. This fault message depends on the setting of
the set reaction [330]. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On
/Off.
[745] M: trip cable S-E: This message occurs as a result of a trip due to an insulation fault
screen-earth. The breaker remains blocked until a CB-off command
cancels the blocking. This fault message depends on the setting of
the set reaction [331]. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On
/Off.
[746] M: screen breaks: This message occurs as a result of a trip due to screen monitoring.
The breaker remains blocked, until a CB-off command cancels the
blocking. This fault message depends on the setting of the set reac-
tion [332]. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On /Off.
[747] M: measurement trip: This message occurs as a result of a trip due to screen monitoring.
The breaker remains blocked, until a CB-off command cancels the
blocking. This fault message depends on the setting of the set reac-
tion [333]. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On /Off.
[748] M: frame fault trip: This message occurs when a frame fault on the ∆I of the protective
unit trips the breaker. The fault message is acknowledged when the
frame fault is acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selec-
tion On / Off.
[749] M: Sustained s c: This message occurs after repeated section testing according to the
test parameters [701-717] if these tests cannot be positively conclu-
ded (without short circuit). The section segment goes into the blok-
ked state and can only be acknowledged by an CB OFF command.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[750] M: close trouble : This message occurs when, despite successful positive section te-
sting, the control is not able to close the section breaker. The section
segment goes into the blocked state and can only be acknowledged
by a CB OFF command. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On
/ Off.
[751] M: opening trouble : This message occurs when, after a CB Off command, it is not possi-
ble to switch off the breaker (e.g. MCB tripped). Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[752] M: MCB tripped: This message occurs when an MCB trip is detected on the DI. Once
the fault has been rectified, the message is also acknowledged. Set-
ting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[753] M: CB trouble : The message CB trouble occurs when checkback signals from the
CB are not acquired in the correct form. If no fault can be detected on

VT39DR Page 79 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

the DIs, the message is acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP: Ex-


pert, Selection On / Off.
[754] M: feedb. fault : This message occurs when the unit detects a defect on the drive
outputs on the protective unit. With this fault the unit must be ser-
viced. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[755] M: Test cont. tr : This message occurs with a fault detection relating to the
drive/checkback of the test contactor. If a fault cannot be detected in
the signal from the test contactor, the message is acknowledged.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[756] M: truck trouble: This message occurs after drawing out the truck and when, after the
expiry of the travel time, the truck is neither in the operating position
nor the test position. Once the truck has been moved to one of the
positions the message is acknowledged automatically. Setting para-
meter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[757] M: transfer trip : This message occurs due to the intertripping signal from the
neighbouring substation. On closure of the circuit breaker, this mes-
sage is acknowledged. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On /
Off.
[758] M: blocking trans : This message occurs due to a blocking signal from the neighbouring
substation (intertripping signal is present for more than 500ms on the
DI). The message is only acknowledged after rectification of the fault
in the neighbouring substation and after successful closure of the CB.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[759] M: input E16: This message occurs when a signal (24V) is present on this input. It is
automatically acknowledged when the signal on the input is reset
(0V). Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[760] M: input E17: This message occurs when a signal (24V) is present on this input. It is
automatically acknowledged when the signal on the input is reset
(0V). Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.
[761] M: PROFIBUS fault: This message occurs on the detection of a Profibus connection fault.
After the link has been successfully restored, the fault is acknowled-
ged. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection On / Off.

5. Protective functions
Under the main group the individual protection functions of the unit can be parameterised in sub-
groups.

 'YVVIRXQSRMXSVMRKKIRIVEP
During operation various situations can arise which cause the tripping of the DC breaker by the
central unit.
The trip functions can be differentiated as:
• Absolute value Imax
• Current step change ∆I
• Rate of rise di/dt and
• UMZ

SITRAS DPU96 Page 80 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

• Minimum voltage Umin


• Maximum voltage Umax
• Cable temperature
• Cable insulation
• Cable screen

For each of the tripping cases current step change ∆I, current slope di/dt and temperature moni-
toring there are tripping and warning thresholds. For the other trips there is only a trip threshold.
• Warning threshold: If the value found for the current step change ∆I, the current slope di/dt or
the cable temperature exceeds the corresponding warning threshold, then a message is
shown on the display and the warning output is activated. The warning output remains active
for at least 2 seconds. After the value falls below the warning threshold, the output is reset
automatically.
Trip threshold: If the value found exceeds the relevant threshold, then a message is shown in the
display and the Trip output also becomes active. Using a parameter, you can set whether the trip
output is activated as a reaction to the exceeding of the trip criterion. The signal outputs remain
active until the trip is acknowledged.
With a “close short circuit” (trip of the monitoring current step change ∆I) the output delayed trip
also becomes active. With a “remote short circuit” (trip of the monitoring current slope) the output
undelayed trip becomes active. When the trip threshold for the cable temperature is exceeded,
the output thermal trip is controlled.
A2 (-X2:30): Signal di/dt trip, IUMZ, IUMZ rev (delayed trip)
A3 (-X2:31): Signal Imax, Imax rev, ∆I trip (undelayed trip)
A4 (-X2:32): Signal output for temperature trip. This output remains driven until
the calculated temperature has reduced by the amount set in the hy-
steresis for cable temperature [119].
The trip functions are subdivided into subgroups.
5.1 I max
The momentary current is monitored for a maximum current Imax. If this limit is exceeded for the
time period "Imax delay", a trip is initiated.
In the normal case the time period Imax is set to 0ms.
This value should only be changed if you want to provide multi-level protection with the primary
trip of the breaker.

VT39DR Page 81 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Tripping

I
Imax

Imax delay

Fig. 30: Trip Imax

The limit Imax and the permitted duration for exceeding the limit can be set with the following pa-
rameters:
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
88 I max delay ms EP EXP Delay period for trip.
90 I trip A EP STA- Trip threshold for maximum current.
91 I trip rev A EP STA Trip threshold for maximum current in reverse direction.

[88] I max delay: In ms, adjustable in a resolution of 0.1ms. This value should be zero if
it is to include no delay in the Imax trip.
[90] I trip : 500 A to 20000 A, adjustable in a resolution of 1 A. The value speci-
fies the Imax trip threshold.
[91] I trip rev: 500 A to 20000 A, adjustable in a resolution of 1 A. The value speci-
fies the Imax trip threshold in the reverse direction. This is of use du-
ring recovery or through coupling.
5.2 ∆I

A current step change is regarded as a change of current with a slope which is higher than can
occur in normal operation. A short circuit is detected before the peak current is reached. This
means that the system is loaded less when tripping the direct current. On account of the fast rise
of current during short circuits in the vicinity of the feeder point, the current trace is sampled and
assessed.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 82 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

With ∆I monitoring the current difference ∆I between a new measurement and the internally
saved base value is formed. The base value for finding the current step change is saved in a regis-
ter. If the current slope is less than a minimum di/dt ([96] ∆I di/dt), then the present current value
becomes the new base value.
If the difference between the present measurement and the base value exceeds the set warning
threshold, a warning is activated. On exceeding the trip threshold, a trip is produced and the DC
breaker opens.

Unwanted trips due to ∆I monitoring of the current peaks can be prevented with the parameter ∆I
delay.

There are the following parameters for the undelayed short-circuit monitoring, cf. Fig. 31 on page
84.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
92 ∆I trip A EP STA ∆I trip threshold
94 ∆I alarm % EP STA % ∆I alarm threshold
95 ∆I delay ms EP STA Delay period until earliest trip initiation
96 ∆I di/dt A/ms EP STA Current slope which must be exceeded so that a ∆I current step change is
detected.
97 ∆I:di/dt durat. ms EP STA Time period in which the current value must remain below the current
slope ∆I di/dt so that a new ∆I current step change is detected.

[92] ∆I trip: Trip threshold from 100 A to 10,000 A, adjustable in a resolution of


1 A. If the traction current exceeds this value after the expiry of the
delay period ∆I delay, then a trip is initiated.
[94] ∆I alarm Alarm threshold of 10% to 110% of the trip threshold ∆I trip, adju-
stable in a resolution of 1%. If the traction current exceeds this value
after the delay period ∆I delay, an alarm is triggered.
The alarm function can be switched off by setting the alarm threshold
to 110%.
[95] ∆I delay Delay period from 0 to 20ms, adjustable in a resolution of 0.1ms. A ∆I
trip is only initiated when the traction current still exceeds the trip
threshold after expiry of the delay period. A setting of 0ms switches
the delay off.
[96] ∆I di/dt: Current slope from 0A/ms to 400A/ms, adjustable in a resolution of
1A/ms. If the di/dt current slope exceeds this value, the ∆I detection
is started. The present current value becomes the base value for the
∆I monitoring. The trip is initiated when the trip threshold ∆I trip with
respect to the base value is exceeded and the delay period ∆I delay
has expired. If the di/dt current slope drops below this value for a cer-
tain period (∆I di/dt duration), then the present current value is taken
as the new base value.
[97] ∆I di/dt durat Time from 0 ms to 4 ms, adjustable in a resolution of 0.1ms. If, du-
ring a running ∆I detection, the current slope falls below the current

VT39DR Page 83 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

slope [96] ∆I di/dt for longer than the time [97] ∆I di/dt durat, the ∆I
detection is stopped. The present current value is taken as the base
value for the ∆I monitoring.

[P93]
I ∆I delay

(2) 7ULSSLQJUDQJH

(3)
(4)
(1)
[P92] ∆I trip

[P96]
t
[P97]
∆I di/dt ∆I di/dt duration ∆I di/dt duration exceeded,
∆I di/dt duration exceeded start of new detection

[P96] ∆I di/dt exceeded &


[P92] ∆I trip exceeded
Tripping
[P93] ∆I delay exceeded
[P97] ∆I di/dt duration not exceeded

Fig. 31 Operating principle for the ∆I trip.

Explanation of Fig. 31:


(1) No trip, ∆I delay is not reached.
Short rises in current due, for example, to capacitor charging processes, thereafter base-load cur-
rents.
(2) Trip, ∆I trip and ∆I delay are exceeded.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 84 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Sharp rise in current which exceeds the preset ∆I delay and the permissible (preset) current step
change ∆I.
(3) Trip, as (2), ∆I di/dt duration is not reached.
Sharp rise in current which exceeds the permissible (preset) current step change ∆I. The preset ∆I
di/dt duration is not exceeded due to the interruption in the rise.
(4) No trip, ∆I di/dt duration is exceeded.
The preset ∆I di/dt duration is exceeded due to the interruption in the rise of current, i.e. a new
current slope detection is started. This means that although the ∆I trip is exceeded, no trip is acti-
vated, because the “& logic condition” for the trip is not satisfied.
With a “close short circuit” (trip of monitoring current step change ∆I) the output undelayed trip
(A3) is also active.

5.3 di/dt
The most remote short circuit must be detected and tripped. The parameter settings for the di/dt
monitoring must be made accordingly.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
100 di/dt trip A/ms EP STA di/dt trip threshold
101 di/dt alarm % EP STA Percentage di/dt alarm threshold
102 di/dt duration ms EP STA Time period for which the di/dt threshold must be exceeded so that a di/dt
trip is initiated.

[100] di/dt trip: 2A/ms to 200A/ms, adjustable in a resolution of 1A/ms. If the current
slope exceeds this value for longer than the set period [102] di/dt du-
ration, a trip is initiated.
[101] di/dt alarm: Alarm threshold of 10% to 110% of maximum current slope di/dt in a
resolution of 1%. If the current slope exceeds this value for longer
than the set time [102] di/dt duration, then an alarm is displayed. The
alarm function can be set to be inactive by setting the alarm thres-
hold to 110%.
[102] di/dt duration: 6 to 200ms, adjustable in a resolution of 1ms. The momentary value
for the current slope di/dt must continuously exceed the trip thres-
hold or the alarm threshold during this period for an alarm or a trip to
be produced.

VT39DR Page 85 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

I
Tripping No tripping
(Case 1) (Case 2)

[P100] di/dt trip

(Case 1)

[P102] di/dt duration t


di/dtfallingbelow
(1)
tripping value again
[P102] di/dt duration (2)

[P100] di/dt trip continuously exceeded &


Tripping
[P102] di/dt duration exceeded

Fig. 32: Principle of the di/dt trip.

Explanation of Fig. 32:


(Case 1) Trip, di/dt trip and di/dt duration are exceeded.
(Case 2) No trip, di/dt duration is not reached.
By increasing the di/dt duration no trip is activated. The unit detects remote short circuits
by monitoring the current slope di/dt via the time di/dt duration. If the current slope con-
tinuously exceeds the threshold value for a certain time, an alarm or trip occurs.
With a “remote” short circuit (triggering of the monitoring current slope) the output delayed trip
(A2) also becomes active.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 86 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

5.4 UMZ/Umin/Umax:
Three different types of protection can be parameterised in the subgroup UMZ/Umin/Umax.

UMZ trip
With definite-time overcurrent-time protection (UMZ) longer sustained currents which do not con-
form to any regular operating situation are taken into consideration. Here the current in the feeder
direction is monitored as well as in the reverse, recovery direction (indicated with rev).

,
\
W
L
V
Q
H
G
L
W
Q
H
U
U
X
&

I> /
I>rev
Tripping

7LPHW

UMZ: t(I>) / UMZ: t(I>rev)

Fig. 33: UMZ

The parameters to be set are located in the main group 5.Protective functions, subgroup 5.4
UMZ/Umin/Umax:
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
126 UMZ:I> A EP STA Trigger current for the UMZ protection in the feeder direction.
127 UMZ:t(I>) s EP STA Time period for which the Parameter 126 must be exceeded to produce a
trip.
128 UMZ:I> rev A EP STA Trigger current for the UMZ protection in the recovery direction.
129 UMZ:t(I> rev) s EP STA Time period for which the Parameter 128 must be exceeded to produce a
trip.

VT39DR Page 87 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Minimum voltage Umin trip


When the contact line voltage drops below a set value [134] and remains below this level for the
set time U min: time [135], a trip and/or an alarm can be activated.
9ROWDJH8

Umin

Tripping
and/or
warning

7LPHW
Umin: time

Fig. 34: Umin

The parameters to be set are located in the main group 5.Protective functions, subgroup 5.4
UMZ/Umin/Umax:
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
134 U min V EP STA Undervoltage acquisition limit
135 U min:time s EP STA Time period for which voltage must remain below the Parameter 134 to
produce a reaction.
136 U min:reaction - EP STA Definition of which reaction occurs on triggering (alarm; OFF; Auto OFF)

SITRAS DPU96 Page 88 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

NOTE
In the equipment as supplied this function is rendered ineffective by the preset values.

Maximum voltage Umax trip


If the contact line voltage increases beyond the set value [137] and remains there for longer than
the set time U max: time [138], a trip and/or an alarm can be activated.
9ROWDJH8

Umax
Tripping
and/or
warning

7LPHW
Umax: time

Fig. 35: Umax

The parameters to be set are located in the main group 5.Protection parameter windows, sub-
group 5.4 UMZ/Umin/Umax:

VT39DR Page 89 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
137 U max V EP STA Overvoltage acquisition limit
138 U max:time s EP STA Time period for which the voltage must remain below Parameter 137 to
produce a reaction.
139 U max:reaction - EP STA Definition of which reaction occurs on triggering (alarm; OFF; Auto OFF)

NOTE
In the equipment as supplied this function is rendered ineffective by the preset values.

5.5 Cable temp.


The operating temperature of the contact line or of the feeder cable can be monitored. The maxi-
mum permissible operating temperature can be exceeded during overloads without the short cir-
cuit monitoring detecting a fault.
The following graph shows qualitatively the temperature trace in a contact line and the effect of
the temperature protection trip.

Cable temperature
Off

On

Tripping Closure Time t

Heating Cooling down

Fig. 36: Temperature trace

For the temperature trip the temperature is calculated from the current values, physical parame-
ters and the ambient temperature based on a thermal model. Here the contact line or the cable is
regarded as an ideal thermal conductor. In the calculation only the thermal conduction is consid-
ered. This results in the following thermal model:

SITRAS DPU96 Page 90 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

p(t) W therm Rtherm

U0

Fig. 37 Thermal cable model

For monitoring the cable temperature the parameter setting must be selected such that the part
most susceptible to temperature is protected.

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
109 Temp.unit — EP EXP Selection of whether temperature is displayed in °C or °F
110 Cable resistance mΩ/m EP STA Resistivity of the feeder cable or contact line.
111 Therm. const. Km/(k EP STA Specific heat constant of the cable or the contact line.
cab. Ws)
112 Time const. cab. s EP STA Heating time constant of the cable or contact line.
113 Ambient temp. °C EP STA Maximum expected ambient temperature in °C.
114 _ambient temp. °F EP STA Maximum expected ambient temperature in °F.
115 ϑ cable trip °C EP STA ϑ trip threshold in °C.
116 _ϑ cable trip °F EP STA ϑ trip threshold in °F.
117 ϑ cable alarm °C EP STA ϑ alarm threshold in °C
118 _ϑ cable alarm °F EP STA ϑ alarm threshold in °F
119 Hyst. cable °C EP STA Temperature difference in K by which the cable temperature must fall
temp. below the trip threshold before the signal output is driven.
120 _hyst. cable °F EP STA Temperature difference in °F by which the cable temperature must fall
temp. below the trip threshold before the signal output is driven.

[109] Temp. unit: Selection of whether the temperature parameters are displayed in °C
or °F. The setting occurs in the subgroup 4.1 Basic data. The parame-
ter entries are automatically converted from °C to °F and vice versa.
[110] Cable resistance: 0.001 mΩ/m to 10 mΩ/m in a resolution of 0.001 mΩ/m for calcula-
ting the cable dissipation.
[111] Therm. const. cab.: 0K*m/(kW*s) to 30K*m/(kW*s) in a resolution of 0.1K*m/(kW*s),
which states by how many degrees Kelvin a cable of length 1m heats
up without losing heat through the addition of 1kWs of energy.
[112] Time const. cable: 1s to 1000s in a resolution of 1s, states the time constant for the
cable cooling without addition of energy.

VT39DR Page 91 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[113] Ambient temp. -20°C to 100°C in a resolution of 1°C, states the maximum ambient
temperature.
Since no measurement is available for the ambient temperature, you
must enter the maximum occurring ambient temperature. If no over-
load occurs for this temperature, then tripping will also not occur for
lower temperatures.
[115] ϑ cable trip 50°C to 150°C in a resolution of 1°C, states the temperature value at
which tripping occurs.
[117] ϑ cable alarm : 50°C to 150°C in a resolution of 1°C, states the temperature value at
which an alarm occurs.
[119] Hyst. cable temp.: After the trip temperature has been exceeded, the trip output is
driven (CB OFF) and the drive is removed from the signal output
when the temperature has fallen to a value lower than the trip tem-
perature [115] minus the Hysteresis cable temperature [119].
When the trip threshold for the cable temperature is exceeded the output thermal trip (A4) is set.

5.6 Cable insulat.


The following parameters are available only with the cable monitoring option:
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
300 Isol. Cable 1 EP STA Switches cable monitor module 1 on and off
301 Isol. Cable 2 EP STA Switches cable monitor module 2 on and off
302 Cable 1: Status BP STA Cable monitor module 1 status message.
303 Cable 2: Status BP STA Cable monitor module 2 status message.
304 Cable 1:R(S- kOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and wire in Feeder cable 1
W)act
305 Cable 2:R(S- kOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and wire in Feeder cable 2
W)act
306 Cable 1:R(S- KOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and earth in Feeder cable 1
E)act
307 Cable 2:R(S- kOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and earth in Feeder cable 2
E)act
308 Cable 1:R(S- kOhm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire in
W)min Feeder cable 1
309 Cable 2:R(S- Ohm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire in
W)min Feeder cable 2
310 Cable 1:R(S- kOhm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth in
E)min Feeder cable 1
311 Cable 2:R(S- kOhm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth in
E)min Feeder cable 2
312 Cable 1: Meas. BP EXP Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for Feeder cable 1
313 Cable 2: Meas. A BP EXP Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for Feeder cable 2

[300] Isol. cable 1: Selection parameter of whether Cable monitor module No. 1 is eva-
luated. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection

SITRAS DPU96 Page 92 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[301] Isol. cable 2: Selection parameter of whether Cable monitor module No. 2 is eva-
luated. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[302] Cable 1 status : Observing param9eter in which status Cable monitor module No. 1 is
operating. Observing parameters AP: Observe, Status faulty, active
....
[303] Cable 2 status : Observing parameter in which status Cable monitor module No. 2 is
operating. Observing parameters AP: Observe, Status faulty, active
....
[304] Cable 1:R(S-W)act: Insulation resistance between screen and wire in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[305] Cable 2:R(S-W)act: Insulation resistance between screen and wire in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[306] Cable 1:R(S-E)act: Insulation resistance between screen and earth in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[307] Cable 2:R(S-E)act: Insulation resistance between screen and earth in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[308] Cable 1:R(S-W)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[309] Cable 2:R(S-W)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[310] Cable 1:R(S-E)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[311] Cable 2:R(S-E)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[312] Cable 1: meas : Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for the feeder
cable. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution: x,y
X is no. of successful measurements, Y is no. of unsuccessful mea-
surements. The ratio x/Y should be positive.
The type of information can be selected via Parameter 334 on page
107.
[313] Cable 2: meas : Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for the feeder
cable. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution: x,y
X is no. of successful measurements, Y is no. of unsuccessful mea-
surements. The ratio x/Y should be positive.
The type of information can be selected via Parameter 334 on page
107.
5.7 Cable screen
The following parameters are used for monitoring the cable screen for breaks:

VT39DR Page 93 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Type Ac- Brief description


cess
level
320 Screen moni- EP STA Setting for screen monitoring
toring
321 Screen 1 FB act BP STA Status of the screen condition
322 Screen 1 FB min EP STA Minimum limit of the screen condition with screen feedback.
323 Screen 1 R min kOhm EP EXP Minimum limit of the screen condition with termination resistance Module
1
324 Screen 2 R min kOhm EP STA Minimum limit of the screen condition with termination resistance Module
2
325 Screen 1 status BP EXP Status message for Screen monitor module 1
326 Screen 2 status BP EXP Status message for Screen monitor module 2

[320] Screen monitoring: Selection parameter for which type of screen monitoring is to be
used. Setting parameter, AP: Expert: Off = No monitoring, FB =
Screen feedback, R = Termination resistance.
[321] Screen 1 FB act: Status of the screen condition in the feeder cable. Observing para-
meter, AP: Observe
[322] Screen 1 FB min: Comparison value for screen feedback (tolerance setting).
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution:
[323] Screen 1 R min: Comparison value for termination resistance at the end of Feeder
cable No. 1.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[324] Screen 2 R min: Comparison value for termination resistance at the end of Feeder
cable No. 2.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[325] Screen 1 status : Status of the screen condition in the feeder cable. Observing para-
meter, AP: Observe
[326] Screen 2 status : Status of the screen condition in the feeder cable. Observing para-
meter, AP: Observe

6. Control
These parameters are only visible with the residual resistance option enabled.
6.1 Test method
No. Name Unit Type Ac- Brief description
cess
level
701 Section test EP EXP Selection parameter for which type of section test is to be carried out.

[701] Section test: Selection parameter for residual voltage detection / residual resistan-
ce detection Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection

SITRAS DPU96 Page 94 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

6.2 Fast test


The function enables a fast closure when the section feeder is already live.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
702 Fast test - EP EXP Test is always carried out or dependent on voltage on the section feeder.
[703,P704]
703 Fast test: U min V EP EXP Voltage limit on the section feeder.

704 Fast test: delay s EP EXP Specified time of how long the voltage limit on the section feeder must be
exceeded.

[702] Fast test: Switching parameter, whether the switch may switch on with a
complete section test or only with a fast test (voltage on the section).
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Yes / No, Default no.
[703] Fast test: U min: Voltage value from which voltage present on the section feeder is
detected. (This information is used for a number of functions).
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 volt, Default: 500 V.
[704] Fast test: delay : Specified time for how long the Parameter Fast test: Umin must be
exceeded in order to detect a voltage on the section.
Setting parameter, AP : Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 2 se-
conds.
6.3 Times
The closure of the circuit breaker with automatic testing is subject to a time reference which is set
with the following parameters.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
705 Primary pause s EP EXP Setting of the primary pause time before the first test.
706 Test time s EP EXP Setting of how long the test contactor is pulled in and the test runs.
707 Test pause s EP EXP Setting for the pause time between the tests (cooling of the test resis-
tance)
708 Wait time s EP EXP Setting for the waiting time which runs between the successful test and
the closure.
709 Test extension s EP EXP Time period after the closure which in the case of a trip appends the test in
the last test cycle executed.
710 Test cycles - EP EXP Number of maximum test cycles.

[705] Primary pause: Waiting period in seconds before first test.


Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 5 se-
conds, Range 3-30 seconds.
[706] Test time : Test duration in seconds. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution:
1 second, Default: 2 seconds, Range 1-8 seconds.

VT39DR Page 95 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[707] Test pause : Test pause time in seconds.


Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 15 se-
conds, Range 10-30 seconds.
[708] Wait time : Waiting time before closure
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, resolution: 1 second, Default: 3 se-
conds, Range 1-10 seconds.
[709] Test extension: Extension of precondition for closure.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution; 1 second, Default: 5 se-
conds, Range 1-10 seconds
[710] Test cycles : Number of test cycles which must be executed.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, resolution: 1, Range: 0-8, Default: 3
6.4 Limits
The closure of the circuit breaker with automatic testing is subject to limits which are set and dis-
played with the following parameters:
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
712 U min section V EP EXP Residual voltage expected during testing of the section with residual volt-
age detection.
713 R min section Ω EP EXP Residual resistance expected during testing of the section with residual
resistance determination.
714 Test voltage V BP BEO Measured test voltage from last test.
716 R section Ω BP BEO Calculated residual resistance from the last test.
717 I test A BP BEO Measured test current of last test.

[712] U min section: Comparison value for the residual voltage detection for the section
test.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01V.
[713] R min section: Comparison value for the residual resistance detection for the section
test.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01 ohm.
[714] Test voltage: Last measurement for the residual voltage detection in the section
test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01V.
[716] R section : Last calculated value for the residual resistance detection in the sec-
tion test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01 ohm
[717] I test : Last measurement of the test current for the residual resistance de-
tection in the section test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01A.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 96 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

6.5 Status
In this subgroup the statuses of the protective unit with its control function can be considered.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
718 SM: sect. feeder - BP BEO Feeder control status message. States in which state the control is oper-
ating. (OFF, ON, test, close, open, ...)
719 SM: test - BP BEO Test run status message (test, test pause, ...), when the test runs. The
message STOP occurs on termination of the test.
720 SM: close - BP BEO Status messages for closure when the closure runs. The message STOP
feeder occurs on termination of the closure.
721 SM: open feeder - BP BEO Status messages for opening when the opening operation runs. After ter-
mination of opening the STOP message occurs.
729 Status: test time s BP BEO Display of the total test time for the last test.

[718] SM sect. feeder : Shows the status of the overall feeder control. Observing parameter
AP: Observe,
Status: On,
Off,
Test,
Close,
Open.

[719] SM: test : Shows the status of the feeder control in partial status Test in more
detail. Observing parameter,
AP: Observe,
Status: Test,
Test pause.
[720] SM: close feeder : Shows the status of the feeder control in partial status Close in more
detail. Observing parameter,
AP: Observe,
Status: Close,
Run-time monitoring.
[721] SM: open feeder : Shows the status of the feeder control in the partial status Open in
more detail. Observing parameter,
AP: Observe,
Status: Open,
Run-time monitoring.
[729] Status: test time : Total running time of the test in seconds, Observing parameter,
AP: Observe,
Resolution: 1 second
The exact status process can be taken from the chapter 6.3.2.2, page 141.

VT39DR Page 97 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

7. PROFIBUS
For the interchange of information between SITRAS DPU96 and the automation systems as well
as the connected decentralised field devices, there is the possibility of serial coupling the protec-
tive units via the PROFIBUS-DP interface.
These parameters are only visible with the appropriately enabled option.
7.1 PROFIBUS
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
500 PROFIBUS-DP EP EXP Switches PROFIBUS DP communications on / off.
501 PROFIBUS-DPE EP EXP Switches PROFIBUS DPE (expansion) communications on / off.
502 PROFIBUS: EP STA Device bus address
address
503 PROFIBUS-DP: EP EXP Transfer profile selection.
Prof
504 PROFIBUS-DP: BP EXP Transfer status for Profibus communications.
Stat

[500] PROFIBUS-DP: Selection parameter for switching the PROFIBUS-DP communica-


tions on/off. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection ON, STOP,
OFF.
After switch-on the communications run up and take over operation.
On switch-on (ON and STOP) all other parameters appear. With ON
the link is established and only with Stop are the other parameters
for setting visible.
[501] PROFIBUS-DPE: Selection parameter for switching the PROFIBUS-DPE on/off. Setting
parameter, AP: Expert, Selection ON, STOP, OFF.
The function is not currently supported.
[502] PROFIBUS:address: Device bus address.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
Setting range between 0-126
[503] PROFIBUS-DP:Prof: Selection of the transfer profile from the quoted options.
Example: 32(14A/10E)
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[504] PROFIBUS-DP:Stat: Transfer status for the Profibus communications.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
00 00 00 FF
FF indicates a successfully established link.
Parameter 504 PROFIBUS-DP:Stat Detailed information
The parameter is displayed as a 32 bit wide hexadecimal figure with
its four bytes having the following meaning (shown as ABCD on dis-
play):

SITRAS DPU96 Page 98 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Byte A (Profibus Watchdog):

bit 7-5 Reserved


bit 4 0: Watchdog off, 1: Watchdog is on.
bit 3-0 Number of watchdog events that have occurred.

Byte B (Status DP server software):

bit 7 1: STATUS_DATA_EXCH, software is handling a cyclical data interchange.


bit 6 1: STATUS_OUTPUTS_NEW, new output data is available.
bit 5 1: STATUS_SYNC, sync mode is activated
bit 4 1: STATUS_FREEZE, freeze mode is activated
bit 3 1: STATUS_BAUDRATE_FOUND, baud rate could be determined
bit 2 1: STATUS_LEAVE, the slave has disconnected from the master (e.g. due to watchdog)
bit 1 1: STATUS_CLEAR, Clear command received via bus.
bit 0: 1: STATUS_TIMEOUT, Profibus watchdog has intervened.

Byte C (Reparameterisation):
The value states how often the slave has received a parameter message from the master.

Byte D (Status of Profibus connection)

bit 7 1: The slave is handling a cyclical data interchange.


bit 6 1: The configuration (input/output data) has been successfully completed.
bit 5 1: A configuration message has been received.
bit 4 1: The parameterisation has been successfully completed.
bit 3 1: A parameterisation message has been received.
bit 2 1: A diagnostic message has been received.
bit 1 1: SAP60 has been triggered, a character has been received.
bit 0: 1: Self-test SPC4 ok

VT39DR Page 99 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

8. Diagnosis
8.1 Start-up
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
10 Trip count reset - EP EXP Resets all counters to zero.
14 Max/min delete - EP STA Resets all maximum and minimum values (Imax, Imax r , Umin).
19 Total current EP EXP Resets the parameter summed current value.
delete
82 Trip block 1x EP EXP A new trip will be suppressed once within the next 10 min.
132 Copy parblock - EP STA Copies one parameter block to the others.
144 Password - EP BEO Password entry for changing the access level Observe -> Standard
Password entry for changing the access level Observe -> Expert
146 Access level - EP BEO Sets the required access level.
148 Access group EP BEO
150 Initialise - EP EXP Causes parameterisation with the unit default values.
152 Offset comp. - EP EXP Executes an offset compensation to compensate for the drift in the buffer
amplifier.

[10] Trip count reset: Resets all counters to zero.


[14] Max/min delete: Sets all maximum and minimum counters to zero.
[19] Total current de : Deletes sum of all tripped currents.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection text: Yes/No (Note: Only vi-
sible with enabled option total current).
[82] Trip block 1x: The next trip can be blocked with this parameter. After the
suppressed trip event has occurred or after the expiry of 10 minutes,
this protective function is reactivated provided it has not been com-
pletely switched off with Parameter [80]. This function is intended for
tests during the commissioning phase. 300µs after the detection of
the trip event, the 24 V DC output and the 250 V DC thyristor output
are driven.

[132] Copy parblock: The copy direction is selected (from Parameter block 1 to 2 or vice
versa). On confirming the parameter the contents of one parameter
block are copied to the other parameter block.
The access level is changed with the following parameters:
[144] Password: Before changing the access level from Observe to a higher level, a
password must be entered here as confirmation. As supplied the
password is set to “1234”.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 100 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[146] Access level: Sets the access level.


Observe Shows the parameters which can only be displayed.
Standard Shows the most common parameters for the protection setting.
Expert Shows all parameters.
Any change from Observe to a higher access level must be enabled by the entry of the password.
[148] Access group: Sets the access group (restriction to one main group)
In order to set the unit to its state as supplied and to completely reinitialise it, there are the fol-
lowing parameters:
[150] Initialize: If this parameter is confirmed, then all parameters apart from the
password and the access level are assigned their default settings.
The measurement, event and alarm memory are deleted. A list of all
default settings is given in Chap. 11.

NOTE
All user-specific settings are deleted on executing the function with YES.

[152] Offset comp.: Here offset voltages originating from the buffer amplifier are com-
pensated. The offset compensation must be executed when the out-
put carries no voltage or current. The parameter is only visible with
CB OFF.

VT39DR Page 101 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

8.2 I/O test


No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
160 Input 8 to 1 - BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals on inputs 1-8.
161 Input 16 to 9 - BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals on inputs 9 - 16
162 Input 24 to 17 - BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals on inputs 17 - 24
163 Output 8 to 1 - EP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary output signals on outputs 1 - 8.
The output signal assignment can be specified in the test mode ( [170] ).
164 Output 16 to 9 - EP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary output signals on outputs 9 –
16. The output signal assignment can be specified in the test mode ( [170]
).
170 Test mode - EP EXP Switches the unit to the test mode. The output signal assignment on out-
puts 1 – 16 can be specified in the test mode.
171 Action mode EP EXP Switches off the action mode on the unit. No further action messages
occur.
550 DM: Word 1 EP EXP These specified message words are transferred as output signals of the
15...8 message area for the PROFIBUS DM: Word 1 15...8. The output signal
assignment can be specified in the test mode [170].
551 DM: Word 1 EP EXP These specified message words are transferred as output signals of the
7...0 message area for the PROFIBUS DM: Word 1 7...0. The output signal
assignment can be specified in the test mode [170].
552 EM: Word 1 EP EXP These specified message words are transferred as output signals of the
15...8 message area for the PROFIBUS EM: Word 1 15...8. The output signal
assignment can be specified in the test mode [170].
553 EM: Word 1 EP EXP These specified message words are transferred as output signals of the
7...0 message area for the PROFIBUS EM: Word 1 7...0. The output signal as-
signment can be specified in the test mode [170].
554 EM: Word 2 EP EXP These specified message words are transferred as output signals of the
15...8 message area for the PROFIBUS EM: Word 2 15...8. The output signal
assignment can be specified in the test mode [170].
555 EM: Word 2 EP EXP These specified message words are transferred as output signals of the
7...0 message area for the PROFIBUS EM: Word 2 7...0. The output signal as-
signment can be specified in the test mode [170].
556 SB: Word 1 BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals of the message
15...8 area for the PROFIBUS SB: Word 1 15...8.
557 SB: Word 1 7...0 BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals of the message
area for the PROFIBUS SB: Word 1 7...0.
558 AB: Word 1 BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals of the message
15...8 area for the PROFIBUS SB: Word 1 15...8.
559 AB: Word 1 BP EXP Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals of the message
7...0 area for the PROFIBUS SB: Word 1 7...0.

With the following parameters you can observe the signal statuses of the digital inputs on the cen-
tral unit (see interface assignment).
[160] Input 8-1: Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals on inputs
1-8.
[161] Input 16-9: Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals on inputs
9-16.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 102 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

( ( ( (


( ( ( (

Fig. 38 Reading the input information.

An input signal ‘1’ signifies:


• E9: CB not in test position.
• E14: CB closed

[162] Input 24-17: Continuously shows the momentary binary input signals on the in-
puts 17-24.

With the following parameters you can observe the signal statuses of the digital outputs on the
central unit and change them in the test mode.
[163] Output 8-1: Continuously displays the momentary binary output signals on out-
puts 1 – 8 as shown in this illustration.

An output signal of ´1´ signifies:


• A1: Group fault
• A2: di/dt trip
• A3: ∆I trip
• A4: Trip, temperature
• A5: VA5 variable output A5
• A6: System ready
• A7: Not used in basic version
• A8: Not used in basic version

In the example: A6=´1´ ⇒ System ready


[164] Output 16-9: Continuously shows the momentary binary output signals on outputs
9-16.
[170] Test mode: Switches the unit into the test mode.
You can specify the signal status on outputs 1-16 in the test mode.

VT39DR Page 103 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

WARNING
In the test mode the central unit cannot drive the digital outputs as required by the
program function, but instead only according to the currently specified details. This
means that trips may be prevented, causing damage. Also, damage may be caused by
the setting of individual outputs without due consideration of the connected equip-
ment. Once testing is finished, the test mode must be switched off. The central unit
automatically switches the test mode off 10 min after the last operation.

[171] Action mode: Switches off the action mode on the unit.
This means that operating statuses can be observed better for test
purposes without the action windows superimposing on the informa-
tion.
The following parameters refer to the message areas of the PROFIBUS (see 6.2.4, page 121):
[550] DM: Word 1 15...8: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 1
Bits 15...8 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[551] DM: Word 1 7...0: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 1
Bits 7...0 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[552] EM: Word 1 15...8: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 1
Bits 15...8 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[553] EM: Word 1 7...0: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 1
Bits 7...0 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[554] EM: Word 2 15...8: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 2
Bits 15...8 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[555] EM: Word 2 7...0: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 2
Bits 7...0 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[556] SB: Word 1 15...8: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 1
Bits 15...8 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[557] SB: Word 1 7...0: Offers the possibility of setting binary signals of Message word 1
Bits 7...0 in the test mode [170].
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[558] AB: Word 1 15...8: Continuously shows the momentary binary command signals of
Command word 1 Bits 15...8. Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Se-
lection.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 104 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[559] AB: Word 1 7...0: Continuously shows the momentary binary command signals of
Command word 1 Bits 7...0. Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Selec-
tion.
8.3 Service
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
70 Tripping test - EP BEO Causes breaker tripping (CB OFF) immediately after confirmation of the
“Yes” option.
158 Options BP STA Enabled options
159 Options input EP EXP Enabling code entry for later activation of an additional function.
165 Fault filter 1 - EP EXP Switches a selectable fault message to inactive so that it does not lead to
a trip or alarm.
166 Fault filter 2 - EP EXP Switches a selectable fault message to inactive so that it does not lead to
a trip or alarm.
167 Fault filter 3 - EP EXP Switches a selectable fault message to inactive so that it does not lead to
a trip or alarm.
168 Fault filter 4 - EP EXP Inhibits all alarms or enables them. Alarms can therefore be made ineffec-
tive.
st
180 Software vers. 1 - BP EXP 1 place of software version (e.g.: contains the value 2 when software
version = 2.10.1389).
nd
181 Software vers. 2 - BP EXP 2 place of software version (e.g.: contains the value 10 when software
version = 2.10.1389).
rd
182 Software vers. 3 - BP EXP 3 place of software version (e.g.: contains the value 1389, when software
version = 2.10.1389)
183 SW vers. day - BP EXP Software generation date, day (e.g.: contains the value 21 when date =
21.09.1998).
184 SW vers. month - BP EXP Software generation date month (e.g.: contains the value 9 when date =
21.09.1998).
185 SW vers. year - BP EXP Software generation date year (e.g.: contains the value 1998 when date =
21.09.1998).
st
186 Parameter vers. - BP EXP Parameter version 1 place
1
nd
187 Parameter vers. - BP EXP Parameter version 2 place
2
190 Memory address - EP EXP Addressing an internal memory cell.
191 Memory data - EP EXP Output of memory content.
334 Int:mode meas- - EP EXP Selects the information of parameter 312/313.
ure
520 Int:comm. board BP EXP Internal status of communications board.
521 Int:comm.DP_s BP EXP Internal status of the DP SW on the communications board.
w
522 Int:comm. ver- BP EXP Version identifier of SW on the communications board.
sion
523 Int:comm. live- BP EXP Internal life-sign signal between main processor board and communication
sig processor board.
780 Intern: signal EP EXP Readout options for internal operations identifiers.
781 Intern: value BP EXP Readout options for internal values of operations identifiers.

VT39DR Page 105 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[70] Tripping test: If you set the parameter to ON, the trip output is activated on confir-
ming the entry.
[158] Options : Output parameter for the set options
[159] Options input: Input parameter for options.
32 options which are displayed in hexadecimal format can be coded.
The binary coding produces the following meanings. Bit =1 signifies
switched on, Bit = 0 signifies switched off
Bit Meaning
0 Automation
1 Bypass disconnector
2 Intertripping function
3 Residual resistance
4 Energy calculation
5 Cable insulation
6 Breaker diagnosis
7 Communications
8 Time synchronisation
9 HW Option 10
10 HW Option 11
11 HW Option 12
12 HW Option 13
13 HW Option 14
14 HW Option 15
15 Offset compensation
16 Automat. on
17 Profibus DP on
18 Profibus DPE on
19 Insulation 1 on
20 Insulation 2 on
21 Residual resistance on
22 HW Option 10 on
23 Automat./Insul. on
24 Insul. Screen 1 FB
25 Insul. Screen 1 R
26 Insul. Screen 2 R
27 Residual voltage ON
28 Temperature in °C
29 Temperature in °F
30 Test mode
[165] Fault filter 1: Parameter for blocking a trip or system message.
[166] Fault filter 2: Parameter for blocking a trip or system message
[167] Fault filter 3: Parameter for blocking a trip or system message
[168] Fault filter 4: Parameter for blocking a trip or system message

SITRAS DPU96 Page 106 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Diagnosis of internal data


The following devices and software characteristic data are saved in parameters:
• Software version and date
• Parameter version
• Device number

Parameter contents using an example of Software Version 2.10.1389 of 21.09.1998:


[180] Software Version 1st place, in example: Value 2.
[181] Software Version 2nd place, in example: Value 10.
rd
[182] Software Version 3 place, in example: Value 1389.
[183] Software generation date, day
[184] Software generation date, month
[185] Software generation date, year

Parameter contents using an example of Parameter Version 12:


[186] Parameter Version 1st place, in example: Value 1.
nd
[187] Parameter Version 2 place, in example: Value 2.
[188] Parameter device identifier: This function is available for system developers.
[190] Memory address:
[191] Memory date:
[334] Int:mode measure: Selection parameter for which status information is displayed in Pa-
rameter 312/313. Basic setting: good/bad, i.e. ratio of positi-
ve/negative measurements.
Error/rise
Error due to sharp rise in measurement.
Error/controller
Error due to measurement controller not being able to set screen vol-
tage.
Error/Uact
Error due to marked variation in output voltage.
[520] Int:comm.board: The parameter is displayed as a decimal number in the format A.B. It
shows the status of the coupling to the communications board.
Byte A (Status):

VT39DR Page 107 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Error Symbol Cause


value
1 L2_INC_STATE_RESET The communications board has been reset by the basic unit.
4 L2_INC_STATE_START The basic unit has removed the reset for the communications board and the
self-test of the DP-RAM runs with initialisation of the communication rou-
tines.
2 L2_INC_STATE_AWAKING After the start phase the basic unit waits until the communications board
signals its presence via the installed communication system.
3 L2_INC_STATE_ONLINE The communications board has signalled its presence to the main board.
The coupling between the basic unit and the communications board runs.
6 L2_INC_STATE_ERROR The coupling to the communications board is in an error state.
5 L2_INC_STATE_RESTART After an error the basic unit waits a certain period until the communications
board restarts. During this waiting period the basic unit is in this state.

Byte B (Timer):
Many states are only maintained for a certain period. For monitoring, the software therefore in-
cludes a timer which decrements every 100ms. The value 0 signifies that no time monitoring is
being carried out in this state.
[521] Int:comm.DP_sw The parameter is shown as a decimal number in the format A.B. It
indicates the status of the DP software.

Byte A (Status):

Error Symbol Cause


value
1 L2_INC_DP_STOP DP communication is switched off.
2 L2_INC_DP_START The DP communication is starting. If the communication board is successful
here, then it signals this to the main board via the communication system.
3 L2_INC_DP_RUN The DP communication was able to be started. Data interchange is taking
place.
4 L2_INC_DP_TERMINATE The DP communication is being halted. If the communication board is suc-
cessful in this, then it signals it to the main board via the communication
system.
5 L2_INC_DP_ERROR The communication board does not react to the commands from the basic
unit..

Byte B (Timer):
Many states are only maintained for a certain period. For monitoring, the software therefore in-
cludes a timer which decrements every 100ms. Therefore, the timer value is displayed in the post-
decimal place. The value 0 signifies that no time monitoring is being carried out in this state.
[522] Int:comm.version The parameter is shown as a decimal number in the format A.B. It
indicates the version of the firmware on the communications board.

Byte A (Version number):


The value divided by 100 supplies the Version identifier 1 and the remainder the Version
identifier 2.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 108 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Byte B (Generation identifier):


The place supplies an unambiguous generation code. The parameter value 103.174 signifies in
order: Version 1: 1, Version 2: 3, Generation code 174.
[523] Int:comm.livesig In order to cyclically test the communications link between the basic
unit and the communications board, time messages are exchanged
every 100ms. In the normal case the life-sign must count at 10 Hz.
Updating of the display only takes place every 100ms however.

This function is available for system developers.


[780] Intern: signal: Readout possibility for internal operation identifiers:
[781] Internal: value : Readout possibilities for the value of the internal operations identifier.

VT39DR Page 109 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

8.4 Analysis

6.1.6.1.2 Analysis of the measurement memory

Content of
Analysis window
I measurement memory
Imax= 5*In

Analysis duration

819 ms t
Start of
t=0
analysis

Fig. 39: Principle of analysis of the current trace I

For a trip you can also analyse the measurement memory without a graphical user interface. The
following parameters for measurement analysis are available for this.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 110 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
30 Analysis start ms EP EXP Start time for the analysis, calculated from the beginning of the measure-
ment recording.
31 Analysis time ms EP EXP Time period for which the analysis is to be carried out, calculated from the
start of analysis.
32 Analysis Imax A BP EXP Output of the maximum current value occurring in the analysis period.
33 Analysis ∆I A BP EXP Output of the maximum current step change occurring in the analysis
period.
34 Analysis di/dt A/ms BP EXP Output of the maximum current slope occurring in the analysis period.
35 Analy. time ∆I ms BP EXP Output of the longest time period occurring in the analysis period and in
which the current step change has exceeded the alarm or trip threshold.
36 Analy. time di/dt ms BP EXP Output of the longest time period occurring in the analysis period and in
which the current slope has exceeded the alarm or trip threshold.
40 Event index 1 EP EXP The value indicates which record in the event memory is copied into the
following parameters.
41 Event type - BP EXP Event identifier for the selected record in the event memory.
42 Event value - BP EXP Event value of the selected record in the event memory.
43 Event date - BP EXP Event date of the selected record in the event memory.
44 Event time - BP EXP Event time of the selected record in the event memory.
45 Action status - BP EXP Indicates whether the event has been acknowledged or not.
46 Action type - BP EXP Indicates the event type.
50 Warn index 1 EP EXP The value indicates which record in the event memory is copied to the
following parameters. The value 0 corresponds to the latest record.
51 Warn type - BP EXP A warning identifier for the selected record in the alarm memory. In the
warning identifier there is a note of whether the warning is still present.
52 Warn value - BP EXP Warning value of the selected record in the alarm memory.
53 Warn date - BP EXP Warning date for the selected record in the alarm memory.
54 Warn time - BP EXP Warning time for the selected record in the alarm memory.
60 Filter time event - EP EXP On resetting the parameter the current time is used as the time base for
the determination of the analysis result Trip/event.
61 Filter type event - EP EXP With this parameter the type of event is specified which is used for the
analysis result Trip/event (e.g. delayed trip di/dt).
62 Event memory 1 BP EXP This parameter contains the number of events of the selected type in the
event memory which have occurred since the evaluation time.
65 Filter time warn - EP EXP On resetting the parameter the current time is used as the timebase for
determining the analysis result Warning.
66 Filter type warn - EP EXP With this parameter the type of event is specified which is used for the
analysis result Warning (e.g. delayed trip di/dt).
67 Alarm memory 1 BP EXP This parameter contains the number of warnings of the selected type in
the alarm memory since the analysis time.

[30] Analysis start : Entry of the start time for the analysis calculated from the beginning
of the measurement memory. The value can be entered from 0 up to
the maximum recording length in a resolution of 0.1 ms. An analysis
start at 0 means that the analysis relates to the complete measure-
ment memory.

VT39DR Page 111 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[31] Analysis time : Entry of the time period which is to be analysed, starting from the
analysis start [30]. An analysis start of 1.5 ms and an analysis time of
1.8 ms means, for example, that the analysis is carried out for the ti-
me period of 1.5 ms to 3.3 ms.
[32] Analysis I max : This parameter shows the maximum occurring current in the analysis
period. For an analysis start = 0 the maximum value of the current for
the complete recorded current trace if the analysis window is set to
be suitably long.
[33] Analysis ∆I : With the selection of this parameter the maximum current step
change for the selected analysis time period is output. For an analysis
start = 0 the maximum value of the current step change for the com-
plete recorded current trace if the analysis window is set to be sui-
tably long.
[34] Analysis di/dt : With the selection of this parameter the maximum current slope for
the selected analysis time period is output. For an analysis start = 0
the maximum value of the current slope for the complete recorded
current trace if the analysis window is set to be suitably long.
[35] Analysis time ∆I : With the selection of this parameter the longest time period during
the selected analysis time period is output in which the current step
change was greater than the alarm or trip threshold (trigger thres-
hold). For an analysis start = 0 the analysis relates to the complete
current trace if the analysis window is set to be suitably long.
[36] Analy. time di/dt : With the selection of this parameter the longest time period during
the selected analysis time period is output in which the current slope
was greater than the alarm or trip threshold (trigger threshold). For an
analysis start = 0 the analysis relates to the complete current trace if
the analysis window is set to be suitably long.

I
Imax= 5*In

∆I warning or trip threshold


Analysis ∆I
Analysis I max

819 ms t

Analysis duration ∆I

Fig. 40: Principle of analysing the current trace I

SITRAS DPU96 Page 112 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

I
Imax= 5*In

Analysis di/dt

Analysis I max

di/dt warning or trip


threshold
819 ms t
Analysis duration di/dt

Fig. 41: Principle of analysing the current trace II

6.1.6.1.3 Analysis of event memory


[40] Event index: The value indicates which record in the event memory is copied to
the following parameters. The value 0 corresponds to the latest re-
cord.
[41] Event type: An unambiguous identification of the event type including the trip
criterion. A note is included of whether the event has already been
acknowledged.
[42] Event value: Actual value at the time of the trip.
[43] Event date: Date of the event in the form DD.MM.YY (D=Day, M=Month,
Y=Year).
[44] Event time: Time of the event in the form HH.MM.SS. (H=Hour, M=Minute,
S=Second).

6.1.6.1.4 Analysis of alarm memory

[50] Warn index: The value indicates which record in the alarm memory is copied to
the following parameters. The value 0 corresponds to the latest re-
cord.
[51] Warn type: Identifier of which event was involved, e.g. delayed trip, breaker on,
capacitor charging fault. The warning type includes a note of whether
the warning is still present.
[52] Warn value: Additional information, e.g. with delayed trip (di/dt) the current value
at the time of the warning.
[53] Warn date: Date in the form DD.MM.YY (D=Day, M=Month, Y=Year).
[54] Warn time: Time in the form HH.MM.SS. (H=Hour, M=Minute, S=Second).

VT39DR Page 113 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

6.1.6.1.5 Evaluation of event/ alarm memory


Using the statistics functions of the central unit you can determine how often certain events have
occurred. The time at which the corresponding parameter was set is always taken as the evalua-
tion time.
[60] Filter time event: The setting EMPTY signifies that no time marker is set and causes
the complete event memory to be searched. With SET you define
the current time as the marker and all new events after this time can
be evaluated. The marker is deleted again with DELETE.
[61] Filter type event: This parameter specifies the type of event which is used for the
evaluation result trip/event e.g. trip di/dt).
[62] Event memory: This parameter contains the number of events of the selected type in
the event memory since the evaluation time.
[65] Filter time warn: The EMPTY setting causes the complete alarm memory to be sear-
ched. With SET you define the current time as the marker and all
new warnings after this time can be evaluated. The marker is deleted
again with DELETE.
[66] Filter type warn: This parameter specifies the type of event which is used for the
evaluation result Warning (e.g. Warning di/dt).
[67] Alarm memory : This parameter contains the number of warnings of the selected type
in the alarm memory since the evaluation time.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 114 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 463*-&97GSRRIGXMSRJSV7-86%7(49

6.2.1 Introduction
Today serial field buses are usually employed as communication systems for the interchange of
information with the SITRAS DPU96, both with the automation systems and with the connected
decentralised field devices. All the relevant information such as input and output data, parameters
and diagnostic data can be transferred over just two wires.
PROFIBUS is an international, open field bus standard which has been standardised in the field
bus standard EN 50 170.
The PROFIBUS standard EN 50 170 describes the versatile performance features of PROFIBUS
and you are referred to it if any uncertainty arises.

6.2.2 PROFIBUS: Brief technical description

6.2.2.1 Fundamental characteristics


PROFIBUS defines the technical and functional features of a serial field bus system with which
distributed digital automation equipment from the field level through to the cell level can be linked
together in a network. PROFIBUS differentiates between master and slave devices.
Master devices control the data traffic on the bus. A master may send messages without external
requests if it possesses the bus access right (token). Masters are also designated in the
PROFIBUS protocol as active stations.
Slave devices are peripheral devices. Typical slave devices are input and output devices, valves,
drives, measuring transducers and in this case the SITRAS®DPU 96 Digital Protective Unit. They
receive no bus access right, i.e. they can only acknowledge received messages or transfer mes-
sages to a master on request. Slaves are also designated as passive stations. They only need a
small part of the bus protocol, enabling an inexpensive implementation.
PROFIBUS provides trouble-free communication of devices from different manufacturers using
special interface adaptation. PROFIBUS is also suitable for fast, time-critical data transfers, as well
as extensive and complex communication tasks, see Fig. 1. PROFIBUS consists of a family of
three compatible variants.
Due to the high speed and the low connection costs PROFIBUS-DP was selected for the SITRAS®
DPU96 unit.
PROFIBUS-DP
This PROFIBUS variant which has been optimised for speed and low connection costs, has been
specially tailored for communications between automation systems and decentralised peripheral
devices at the field level. PROFIBUS-DP is suitable as a substitute for conventional, parallel signal
transmission with 24V or 0-20mA.

6.2.2.2 Device master data GSD


PROFIBUS devices have different performance features. They differ in relation to the functions
which are available (e.g. number of I/O signals, diagnostic messages) or the possible bus parame-

VT39DR Page 115 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

ters such as baud rate and time monitoring. These parameters are individual to each device type
and manufacturer. They are normally documented in the device operating manual. In order to pro-
vide simple Plug & Play configuration for PROFIBUS, the characteristic device features are defined
in the form of an electronic device data sheet (device master data file, i.e. GSD file.). The stan-
dardised GSD data extends open communications to the operating level. With configuration tools
based on GSD files, the integration of devices from various manufacturers into one bus system is
simple and user-friendly.
The device master data describes the features of a device type clearly and comprehensively in a
precisely defined format. The GSD is individually produced by the device manufacturer for each
device type and made available to the user in the form of a device master data sheet. Due to the
defined file format the configuration system can simply read in the device master data from any
PROFIBUS-DP device, automatically including it in the configuration of the bus system. The project
design engineer no longer needs to search through device manuals. The configuration system can
automatically carry out checks for entry errors even during the configuration phase and test the
consistency of the entered data in relation to the overall system.
The device master data file is subdivided into three sections:
• General definitions
This section supplies details about the manufacturer and device names, hardware and soft-
ware versions as well as the baud rates that are supported, the possible time spans for moni-
toring times and the signal assignment on the bus connector.
• Definitions relating to the DP master
In this section all parameters are recorded which are relevant only to DP master devices, e.g.:
the maximum number of DP slaves that can be connected or the upload and download possi-
bilities. This section is not present with slave devices.
• Definitions relating to DP slaves
Here, all details specific to slaves are given, e.g. the number and type of I/O channels, defini-
tion of diagnostic texts and details about the consistency of the I/O data.

The parameters are separated in the individual sections by code words. There is a difference be-
tween mandatory parameters (e.g. Vendor_name) and optional parameters (e.g.
Sync_mode_supported). The definition of parameter groups facilitates the selection of options. In
addition there is the possibility of integrating bit-map files with the device symbols. The GSD for-
mat is designed to be very flexible. It contains both listings, such as for example details of which
baud rates the device supports as well as ways of describing the modules made available by a
modular device. Plain text can also be allocated to the diagnostic messages.
GSD library in the WWW
The GSD files of all PROFIBUS-DP devices are made available via the servers at the PROFIBUS
User Organisation. The address is:
http://www.profibus.com/
Ident number
Each DP slave and each DP master of Class 1 must have an ident number. This is required so that
a master can identify the types of connected devices without any significant protocol overhead.
The master compares the ident number of the connected DP devices with the ident numbers in
the configuration data specified in the configuration tool. The user data transfer is then only started
when the correct device types are connected to the bus with the correct station addresses. This
provides high security against configuration errors.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 116 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

The ident number of the SITRAS® DPU96 is 8051HEX.

6.2.3 Parameter communication function


The following parameters can be set for the relevant application:
PROFIBUS

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
500 PROFIBUS-DP EP EXP Switches the PROFIBUS DP communication on/off.
501 PROFIBUS-DPE EP EXP Switches the PROFIBUS DPE (extended) communication on/off.
502 PROFIBUS: EP STA Device bus address.
address
503 PROFIBUS-DP: EP EXP Selection of the transfer profile.
Prof
504 PROFIBUS-DP: BP EXP Transfer status of PROFIBUS communications.
Stat

[500] PROFIBUS-DP: Selection parameter, switches the PROFIBUS DP communication


function on/off. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection ON, STOP,
OFF.
After switch-on the communications run up and take over operation.
With switch-on (ON and STOP) all other parameters appear.
The link is established with ON and the other parameters only be-
come visible for setting with Stop.
[501] PROFIBUS-DPE: Selection parameter, switches the PROFIBUS DPE communication
function on/off. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection ON, STOP,
OFF.
This function is not currently supported.
[502] PROFIBUS:address: Device bus address
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
Setting range is between 0-126
[503] PROFIBUS-DP:Prof: Selection of the transfer profile from the specified possibilities.
Example: 32(14A/10E)
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[504] PROFIBUS-DP:Stat: Transfer status of the PROFIBUS communication.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
00 00 00 FF.
FF indicates that the link is successfully established.
Parameter 504 PROFIBUS-DP:Stat Detailed information. The pa-
rameter is represented as a 32 bit wide hexadecimal number with its
four bytes having the following significance (shown as ABCD on dis-
play):

VT39DR Page 117 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Byte A (Profibus Watchdog):

bit 7-5 Reserved


bit 4 0: Watchdog off, 1: Watchdog is on.
bit 3-0 Number of watchdog events that have occurred.

Byte B (Status DP server software):

bit 7 1: STATUS_DATA_EXCH, software is handling a cyclical data interchange.


bit 6 1: STATUS_OUTPUTS_NEW, new output data is available.
bit 5 1: STATUS_SYNC, sync mode is activated
bit 4 1: STATUS_FREEZE, freeze mode is activated
bit 3 1: STATUS_BAUDRATE_FOUND, baud rate could be determined
bit 2 1: STATUS_LEAVE, the slave has disconnected from the master (e.g. due to watchdog)
bit 1 1: STATUS_CLEAR, Clear command received via bus.
bit 0: 1: STATUS_TIMEOUT, Profibus watchdog has intervened.

Byte C (Reparameterisation):
The value states how often the slave has received a parameter message from the master.

Byte D (Status of Profibus connection)

bit 7 1: The slave is handling a cyclical data interchange.


bit 6 1: The configuration (input/output data) has been successfully completed.
bit 5 1: A configuration message has been received.
bit 4 1: The parameterisation has been successfully completed.
bit 3 1: A parameterisation message has been received.
bit 2 1: A diagnostic message has been received.
bit 1 1: SAP60 has been triggered, a character has been received.
bit 0: 1: Self-test SPC4 ok

The following information is available as diagnostic and service information:

SITRAS DPU96 Page 118 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

8.3 Service

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
70 Tripping test - EP BEO Causes breaker tripping (CB OFF) immediately after confirmation of the
“Yes” option.
158 Options BP STA Enabled options
159 Options input EP EXP Enabling code entry for later activation of an additional function.
165 Fault filter 1 - EP EXP Switches a selectable fault message to inactive so that it does not lead to
a trip or alarm.
166 Fault filter 2 - EP EXP Switches a selectable fault message to inactive so that it does not lead to
a trip or alarm.
167 Fault filter 3 - EP EXP Switches a selectable fault message to inactive so that it does not lead to
a trip or alarm.
168 Fault filter 4 - EP EXP Inhibits all alarms or enables them. Alarms can therefore be made ineffec-
tive.
st
180 Software vers. 1 - BP EXP 1 place of software version (e.g.: contains the value 1 when software
version = 1.5.1200).
nd
181 Software vers. 2 - BP EXP 2 place of software version (e.g.: contains the value 5 when software
version = 1.5.1200).
rd
182 Software vers. 3 - BP EXP 3 place of software version (e.g.: contains the value 1200, when software
version = 1.5.1200)
183 SW vers. day - BP EXP Software generation date, day (e.g.: contains the value 18 when date =
18.8.1995).
184 SW vers. month - BP EXP Software generation date month (e.g.: contains the value 8 when date =
18.8.1995).
185 SW vers. year - BP EXP Software generation date year (e.g.: contains the value 1995 when date =
18.8.1995).
st
186 Parameter vers. - BP EXP Parameter version 1 place
1
nd
187 Parameter vers. - BP EXP Parameter version 2 place
2
190 Memory address - EP EXP Addressing an internal memory cell.
191 Memory data - EP EXP Output of memory content.
520 Int:comm. board BP EXP Internal status of communications board.
521 Int:comm.DP_s BP EXP Internal status of the DP SW on the communications board.
w
522 Int:comm. ver- BP EXP Version identifier of SW on the communications board.
sion
523 Int:comm. live- BP EXP Internal life-sign signal between main processor board and communication
sig processor board.
780 Intern: signal EP EXP Readout options for internal operations identifiers.
781 Intern: value BP EXP Readout options for internal values of operations identifiers.

[520] Int:comm.board: Internal status of communication board.


Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Display 3.0
[521] Int:comm.DP_sw: Internal status of the DP software on the communication board.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Selection

VT39DR Page 119 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[522] Int:comm.version: Version identifier of the software on the communication board.


Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Display 101.161.
[523] Int:comm.livesig: Internal life signal between main processor board and communication
board.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, continuously changing number.
4.3 I/O assignment
Using parameters it is possible to enable the inputs for a preassigned allocation of functions:
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
722 Input I 16 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
723 Input I 17 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.

724 Input I 18 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
725 Input I 19 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
726 Input I 20 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
727 Output O 5 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for this output.
728 Output O 9 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for this output.

[722] Input I 16: Selection parameter for using the variable input: Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection
Message : Message via Profibus
Open Direct 1: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 2: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 3: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 4: Tripping of section feeder
Open Autom. 1: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 2: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 3: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 4: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Precond. 1: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 2: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 3: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 4: Precondition signal must be present for test
Bypass disco.: Enable of bypass disconnector control (only for follo-
wing option)
Inp hand cra: Hand crank signal Open bypass disconnector not con-
nected (only for option Bypass disconnector interlocking and enable
(E10433-E9705-F003)
Open Block 1: Tripping of section feeder with blocking.
Open Block 2: Tripping of section feeder with blocking.
Cable 1 Enable: Enable signal for Cable Monitor Module 1
Cable 2 Enable: Enable signal for Cable Monitor Module 2
[723] Input I 17: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]

SITRAS DPU96 Page 120 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[724] Input I 18: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[725] Input I 19: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[726] Input I 20: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[727] Output O 5: Selection parameter for using the variable output. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection]
Command PROFI : Command via PROFIBUS
Inhibit bypass: Inhibit on bypass disconnector control (only for option
Bypass disconnector interlock and enable.
(E10433-E9705-F003)
Cable insulat: Cable insulation message
Warn cable te: Warning cable temperature
Warning: Group message warning
Cable S-W: Cable insulation fault screen-wire
Cable S-E: Cable insulation fault screen-earth
Cable meas. fault: Cable insulation measurement fault
Cable screen: Cable insulation fault screen break
Cable trip: Trip by cable monitor module
Cable mess.: Warning message by cable monitor module
Umin: U<Umin: Feeder voltage lower than Umin
Umax: U>Umax: Feeder voltage higher than Umax
Blocking: Feeder is blocked.
[728] Output O 9: Selection parameter for using the variable output; Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [727]

 8VERWJIVTVSJMPIW
The user data content from and to the SITRAS® DPU96 can be adapted by selecting the appropri-
ate transfer profile.
The data is structured as follows:
From a PROFIBUS DP master station to a SITRAS DPU96 slave.
Outputs correspond to the commands on the central unit. This output area is subdivided into vari-
ous sections:
• Date, time, synchronisation identifiers
• Switching commands to the circuit breaker (2-bit commands), general commands (1-bit com-
mands).
• Test limits, automation times, number of tests, acceptance identifier.

An identifier must be selected depending on the selection of which of these sections is to be


transferred.

VT39DR Page 121 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Example:
The time should be able to be set in the command direction and the commands transferred. The
messages and the measurements should be transferred in the message direction.

Identifier 1 Date / time DB / EB A-times Reserve


(10Byte) (4Byte) (10Byte) (8Byte)
1 X
2 X
3 X X <= Example
4 X X
5 X X X
6 X X X X

From a SITRAS® DPU96 slave to a PROFIBUS DP master station.


Inputs correspond to the messages from the central unit. This input area is subdivided into various
sections:
• Date, time
• Double messages (2-bit messages), single messages (1-bit messages)
• Test results, automation times, number of tests
• Energy and power values, summed breaking current (if appropriate options are enabled)

An identifier must be selected depending on the selection of which of these sections is to be


transferred.
Identifier 2 Date / time DM / EM Measurements A-times Energy Reserve(6Byte)
(10Byte) (6Byte) (4Byte) (12Byte) (10Byte)
1 X
2 X X <= Example
3 X X X
4 X X X X
5 X X X
6 X X X X
7 X X X X X
8 X X X X X X

Transfer profile identifier = Identifier 1, Identifier 2


For this example a transfer profile of 32 is produced.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 122 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Communications profile data content (Example with profile 68)


Process Send Destination addresses
for
>> DE SS inv. area SIMATIC SIMATIC
<<DA Terminal DC / Section output DPU96 Unit S7 S5
Time message Word 1
Year / Month 0xC0E4 BCD DBW 10 / 11 DW 1
Day / Hours 0xC0E5 BCD DBW 12 / 13 DW 2
Min / Seconds 0xC0E6 BCD DBW 14 / 15 DW 3
1/100 / 1/1000 seconds 0xC0E7 BCD DBW 16 / 17 DW 4
Not used 0xC0E8 DBW 18 / 19 DW 5

Double messages Word 1 [550] DBB 20 DW6


E9 X2:26 x Truck in disconnected position (6sec) 0xC0E9 BIN DBX 20.0 D 6.8
E8 X2:40 x Truck in operating position (6sec) 0xC0EA BIN DBX 20.1 D 6.9
E13 X2:44 Circuit breaker open 0xC0EB BIN DBX 20.2 D 6.10
E14 X2:45 Circuit breaker closed 0xC0ED BIN DBX 20.3 D 6.11
CB closure blocked BIN DBX 20.4 D 6.12
CB closure possible BIN DBX 20.5 D 6.13
------ Automatic operation OFF BIN DBX 20.6 D 6.14
------ Automatic operation ON BIN DBX 20.7 D 6.15
[551] DBB 21
Remote control OFF BIN DBX 21.0 D 6.0
E2 X2:20 Remote control ON BIN DBX 21.1 D 6.1
------ Test not active BIN DBX 21.2 D 6.2
------ Test active BIN DBX 21.3 D 6.3
Test contactor OFF BIN DBX 21.4 D 6.4
E15 X2:46 Test contactor ON BIN DBX 21.5 D 6.5
Intertripping operation OFF BIN DBX 21.6 D 6.6
Intertripping operation ON BIN DBX 21.7 D 6.7

Single messages Word 1 [552] DBB 22 DW7


E11 X2:42 MCB trip BIN DBX 22.0 D 7.8
E10 X2:41 Frame fault protection 64 DC tripped BIN DBX 22.1 D 7.9
Intertripping neighbour substation BIN DBX 22.2 D 7.10
Blocking neighbour substation BIN DBX 22.3 D 7.11
System not ready BIN DBX 22.4 D 7.12
--- BIN DBX 22.5 D 7.13
Sustained short circuit BIN DBX 22.6 D 7.14
No cable voltage ( depends on [703]) BIN DBX 22.7 D 7.15
[553] DBB 23
Protective trip group message BIN DBX 23.0 D 7.0
Protective trip uvz BIN DBX 23.1 D 7.1
Protective trip vz BIN DBX 23.2 D 7.2
Overcurrent trip (breaking opening, N-release) BIN DBX 23.3 D 7.3

VT39DR Page 123 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Process Send Destination addresses


for
>> DE SS inv. area SIMATIC SIMATIC
<<DA Terminal DC / Section output DPU96 Unit S7 S5
Cable temperature warning BIN DBX 23.4 D 7.4
Cable temperature trip BIN DBX 23.5 D 7.5
Cable fault screen-wire BIN DBX 23.6 D 7.6
Cable fault screen-earth BIN DBX 23.7 D 7.7

Single messages Word 2 [554] DBB 24 DW8


Unsuccessful attempt at closure BIN DBX 24.0 D 8.8
Test contactor fault BIN DBX 24.1 D 8.9
Circuit breaker fault BIN DBX 24.2 D 8.10
Truck position fault BIN DBX 24.3 D 8.11
Cable fault, screen break BIN DBX 24.4 D 8.12
Cable fault, S-E measurement error BIN DBX 24.5 D 8.13
Transfer monitoring "1" BIN DBX 24.6 D 8.14
Transistor defective (Diagnostic fault 1) BIN DBX 24.7 D 8.15
[555] DBB 25
E16 X2:47 VE16: BIN DBX 25.0 D 8.0
E17 X2:48 VE17: BIN DBX 25.1 D 8.1
E18 X2:49 VE18: BIN DBX 25.2 D 8.2
E19 X2:50 VE19: BIN DBX 25.3 D 8.3
E20 X2:51 VE20: BIN DBX 25.4 D 8.4
BIN DBX 25.5 D 8.5
Parameter block 1 BIN DBX 25.6 D 8.6
Parameter block 2 BIN DBX 25.7 D 8.7

Measurements DW9
OUTPUT CURRENT (measurement) A DBW 26 DW 9
SS-SPANNUNG (measurement) V DBW 28 DW 10
Total test time s DBW 30 DW 11
Test result 0,001O DBW 32 DW 12
hm /
0.01V
Number of tests n DBW 34 DW 13
Primary pause s DBW 36 DW 14
Pause s DBW 38 DW 15
Test time s DBW 40 DW 16
Feeder energy MWh DBW 42 DW 17
Recovered energy MWh DBW 44 DW 18
Feeder power kW DBW 46 DW 19
Recovered power kW DBW 48 DW 20
Breaking current ( Sum ) kA DBW 50 DW 21
DBW 52 DW 22
DBW 54 DW 23

SITRAS DPU96 Page 124 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Process Send Destination addresses


for
>> DE SS inv. area SIMATIC SIMATIC
<<DA Terminal DC / Section output DPU96 Unit S7 S5
DBW 56 DW 24
Time command Word 1
Year / Month BCD DBW 60 / 61 DW 1
Day / Hours BCD DBW 62 / 63 DW 2
Min / Seconds BCD DBW 64 / 65 DW 3
1/100 / 1/1000 Seconds BCD DBW 66 / 67 DW 4
Accept time D5.15 (pos. edge) BCD DBW 68 / 69 DW 5

Switching commands Word 1 / Control sta- DBB 70 DW6


tion/signalling system [556]
Parallel DI local Circuit breaker OFF local BIN DBX 70.0 D 6.8
parallel DI local Circuit breaker ON local BIN DBX 70.1 D 6.9
Circuit breaker OFF from remote BIN DBX 70.2 D 6.10
Circuit breaker ON from remote BIN DBX 70.3 D 6.11
Circuit breaker ON directly local BIN DBX 70.4 D 6.12
Circuit breaker ON directly from remote BIN DBX 70.5 D 6.13
BIN DBX 70.6 D 6.14
BIN DBX 70.7 D 6.15
[557] DBB 71
BIN DBX 71.0 D 6.0
BIN DBX 71.1 D 6.1
BIN DBX 71.2 D 6.2
BIN DBX 71.3 D 6.3
BIN DBX 71.4 D 6.4
BIN DBX 71.5 D 6.5
BIN DBX 71.6 D 6.6
BIN DBX 71.7 D 6.7

General commands Word 1 / Control sta- DBB 72 DW7


tion/signalling system [558]
VA5: (Set output) [727] BIN DBX 72.0 D 7.8
VA9: (Set output) [728] BIN DBX 72.1 D 7.9
BIN DBX 72.2 D 7.10
BIN DBX 72.3 D 7.11
BIN DBX 72.4 D 7.12
BIN DBX 72.5 D 7.13
BIN DBX 72.6 D 7.14
BIN DB 72.7 D 7.15
[559] DBB 73
Remote control OFF (pos. edge) BIN DBX 73.0 D 7.0
Remote control ON (pos. edge) BIN DBX 73.1 D 7.1
Parameter block 1 (pos. edge) BIN DBX 73.2 D 7.2

VT39DR Page 125 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Process Send Destination addresses


for
>> DE SS inv. area SIMATIC SIMATIC
<<DA Terminal DC / Section output DPU96 Unit S7 S5
Parameter block 2 (pos. edge) BIN DBX 73.3 D 7.3
Intertripping operation OFF BIN DBX 73.4 D 7.4
Intertripping operation ON BIN DBX 73.5 D 7.5
Acknowledge messages (pos. edge) BIN DBX 73.6 D 7.6
Acknowledge cable fault blocking (pos. edge) BIN DBX 73.7 D 7.7

Parameter setting values DBW 74 DW8


Test limit 0,001O DBW 74 / 75 DW 8
hm /
0.01V
Accept param. D9.15 (pos. edge) / Number of n DBW 76 / 77 DW 9
tests
Primary pause s DBW 78 / 79 DW 10
Pause s DBW 80 / 81 DW 11
Test time s DBW 82 / 83 DW 12
DBW 84 / 85 DW 13
DBW 86 / 87 DW 14
DBW 88 / 89 DW 15
DBW 90 / 91 DW 16

 8MQIW]RGLVSRMWEXMSR 3TXMSRJSV463*-&97GSRRIGXMSR


The option enables the synchronisation of the time and date in the protective units.
An appropriate transfer profile must be selected to be able to use this option. By setting the corre-
sponding time synchronisation bit (D5.15), the time is accepted into the unit from the message
due to the positive edge. The accuracy of the synchronisation is +/- 200ms.

 'IRXVEPYRMXEHHMXMSREPJYRGXMSRW I\XIRHIHPIZIP

 +IRIVEPVIQEVOWEFSYXXLISTXMSRW
The central unit can be extended by functional options. These functions must be stated when or-
dering. Then the options are enabled and automatically tested during the routine testing of the
units. Depending on the enabled options, the corresponding parameters are displayed.
The SITRAS DPU96 offers the possibility of also ordering these functions later and of enabling
them via a special code.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 126 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

SITRAS DPU96 PU E10433-E9502-H2xx


SITRAS DPU96 PU
Central Unit
Zentralgerät (Ausbauversion)
with Profibus connection E10433-E9702-H2xx

Section feeder panel control function E10433-E9705-F001

Intertripping functions E10433-E9705-F002

Bypass disconnector locking and enable E10433-E9705-F003

Test current detection/residual resist. determin. E10433-E9705-F004

Cable monitoring E10433-E9705-F007

Power and energy calculation E10433-E9705-F009

Saving switch loading E10433-E9705-F010

Time synchronisation E10433-E9705-F005

Fig. 42: Selection criteria for SITRAS DPU96 PU options.

 7IGXMSRJIIHIVGSRXVSPJYRGXMSR

 3FNIGXMZI
The task of the section switchgear is to distribute the direct current from the rectifier to the sec-
tion segments. In this respect the highest possible availability must be ensured in the feeder ar-
eas, also during operational faults.
Solution concept:
Employment of special switchgear with high-speed circuit breakers which can selectively switch
off the feeder segments during faults. The short contact opening and arcing times ensure effec-
tive limiting of the short circuit current.
Accommodation of the high-speed breaker in a compact truck without disconnectors, which in the
case of a fault can be withdrawn in the shortest possible time and replaced with a substitute
truck.
To protect the section output and to monitor and control the truck system, a separate SITRAS
DPU96, which is integrated into the low voltage compartment of the section output, is used for
each section panel.
An additional increase in availability is achieved by this panel control function with an integrated
automatic test and reclosure system which automatically recloses the section breaker after tem-
porary short circuits.
The automation and control of the section breaker occurs in a fixed specified form. These func-
tional procedures can be adapted to particular system-specific requirements using parameters.

 0SGEXMSRSJXLIWIGXMSRJIIHIVGSRXVSP
The location of the section panel control function with integral automatic test and reclosing system
in the SITRAS DPU96 Protective Unit consists of the section feeder panels with di/dt protective
functions and bypass panels with this protective function.

VT39DR Page 127 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

The section panel control function with integral automatic test and reclosing system does not
however include a bypass disconnector control. This must be provided in a separate automation
unit.

 7IGXMSRTERIPJYRGXMSRW

 'SQQERHERHWMKREPPMRKHIJMRMXMSRW

Switching command 2-bit command


Example: LOCAL command CB ON
LOCAL command CB OFF
Each of the associated command signals or command bits has one effective state, usually single
pulse.
The two command signals or command bits operate inversely with respect to one an-
other.
Only one of them can occur at a given time.

General command 1-bit command


Example: Set VA5 variable output.
The command signal or command bit has 2 effective states.

State 1 Command as command text


State 0 Command inverse to command text

Double signal 2-bit message


Example: CBK section breaker ON
CBK section breaker OFF
Each of the 2 message signals or message bits has 2 effective states.
State 1 Message content as message text
State 0 Message content inverse to message text
The two message signals or message bits indicate inverse states. If this is not the case, then after
the expiry of a switching delay period, a fault is present.

Single message 1-bit message


Example: Truck latched
The message signal or message bit has 2 effective states
State 1 Message content as message text
State 0 Message content inverse to message text

SITRAS DPU96 Page 128 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 8VYGOTSWMXMSRW
The usual operating positions of the truck are shown using the SITRAS 8MF94 switchgear as an
example.
Operating position:
Truck is fully inserted.

Disconnected / test position:

Fig. 43: SITRAS 8MF94, truck in disconnected / test position.

The truck is withdrawn to provide a defined isolation position. The function of the high-speed
breaker can be tested in the system without traction voltage.
Removed position:
The truck is fully withdrawn to be able to carry out maintenance and servicing tasks.

 3TIVEXMSRMRXLISTIVEXMRKTSWMXMSR
The high-speed breaker panel is controlled from the SITRAS DPU96 with the section panel control
function with integrated automatic test and reclosing system. All opening and closing commands
required for operation are output from the SITRAS DPU96, both in local operation as well as with
control via telecontrol.
The opening and closing of the high-speed DC breaker as required for operation can take place via:
• Illuminated pushbutton in the cabinet door,
• binary signals from the telecontrol via digital inputs or serial signals from the telecontrol or a
centralised operating console (Operator Panel) via PROFIBUS (EN 50170 Part 2).

In the basic version of the SITRAS 8MF94 example system the following operating equipment is
fitted to the door of the low voltage compartment:

VT39DR Page 129 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Meldeleuchte
Group Sammelalarm
alarm signal lamp

Strommesser
Ammeter

„Ort/Fern“-Wahlschalter
"Local/remote" selector

Leuchtdrucktaster
Illuminated Gleichstrom-
pushbutton, High-speed DC breaker
ON/OFF
Schnellschalter EIN/AUS
A
E

Fig. 44: SITRAS 8MF94 low voltage compartment

In the switched-off state and with the control voltage present the illuminated pushbutton OFF is lit
permanently. When switched on during operation, a section test is first carried out automatically
and also the illuminated pushbutton ON flashes. If the section has no short circuits, the high-speed
DC breaker closes, the pushbutton ON changes to being continuously lit and the pushbutton OFF
goes out.
With a (sustained) short circuit on the section segment the high-speed DC breaker is blocked
against reclosure, the flashing illuminated pushbutton ON goes out and the signal lamp Group
alarm is continuously lit.
An overcurrent trip (Imax, ∆I, di/dt) of a DC breaker that has been operationally closed results in an
automatic section test and reclosure.
A trip of the cable temperature monitoring of a DC breaker that has been operationally closed re-
sults in the an automatic section test and reclosure if the calculated actual cable temperature falls
below the trip temperature minus the hysteresis temperature.
The button Direct ON is intended exclusively for closing the high-speed DC breaker without prior
section testing by the SITRAS DPU96. The protective equipment is set to function irrespective of
this.

NOTE
In contrast to operational closure, the automatic operation of the section test equip-
ment is not activated with Direct ON. An overcurrent trip of a DC breaker closed with
Direct ON does not result in an automatic section test and reclosure.

The operational possibilities are limited by the position of the local/remote selection switch:
This selection is also possible by command from a local operating panel via the PROFIBUS if the
unit is fitted with this option.
Closure of the CB
The CB is closed by a

• remote or LOCAL – CB ON – command (activation of the automatic test and reclosure sys-
tem)
• CB DIRECT ON - command

SITRAS DPU96 Page 130 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Opening of the CB
The CB and also the automatic test and reclosure system is switched off by:
• Remote or LOCAL – CB OFF – command or
• Operation of the truck locking shaft or
• Blocking by the frame fault protection
• Fault in the automation
• Optional inputs

Tripping of the CB
If the CB is switched off by a unit protective function trip (Imax, ∆I, di/dt,....) or via the overcurrent
trip (primary protection), then the automatic reclosing system is active if the CB was closed opera-
tionally.
Selection remote
Closure of the high-speed DC breaker:
• Remote command CB ON
• Local Direct CB ON

Opening the high-speed DC breaker:


• Remote command CB OFF
• Local command CB OFF

Selection local
Closure of the high-speed DC breaker:
• Local command CB ON
• Local Direct CB ON

Opening the high-speed DC breaker:


• Local command CB OFF

Operation in disconnected / test position


In the disconnected / test position all the previously mentioned switching operations can be car-
ried out without risk.
Operation in the removed position
In the removed position the high-speed DC breaker can only be closed if the information regarding
the CB operating position and a defined CB position are available in the switchgear (Note: Simula-
tion).

 %YXSQEXMGXIWXERHVIGPSWMRKW]WXIQ
Practice has shown that rail electrification systems are more subject to frequently occurring pulse
type overloads and temporary short circuits than to infrequently occurring sustained short circuits.
In order to restrict the time for the failure of the affected feeder segment, protection and control
equipment is employed which, after a CB ON command or immediately after an overcurrent trip,

VT39DR Page 131 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

tests the affected segment for short circuits and recloses the appropriate section breaker if no
short circuit is present.
This protection and control equipment operates to a program consisting of tests, test pauses and
closures of the CB with successful testing or closure blocking of the CB after a number of unsuc-
cessful test attempts. In the latter case the message “Sustained short circuit” [A8] occurs.
The determination of the section state “no short circuits” occurs using a test resistance and test
contactor. The voltage drop arising across the residual resistance is measured. If it exceeds an
adjustable limit, then the contact line has no short circuit. With the option Test current measure-
ment / residual resistance determination the test current is also measured and calculated with the
residual voltage across the residual resistance.
The test sequence program is shown graphically and described in Fig. 45 on page 136.

6. Control
These parameters are only visible with the residual resistance option enabled.
6.1 Test method
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
701 Section test EP EXP Selection parameter for which type of section test is to be carried out.

[701] Section test: Selection parameter residual voltage detection / residual resistance
detection. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection.

6.2 Fast test


The function enables a fast closure when the section feeder is already live.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
702 Fast test - EP EXP Test is always carried out or depends on voltage on section
feeder.[703,P704]
703 Fast test: U min V EP EXP Voltage limit on the section feeder.
704 Fast test: delay s EP EXP Time figure for how long the voltage limit must be exceeded on the sec-
tion feeder.

[702] Fast test: Switching parameter of whether the breaker can close with a full
section test or just with a fast test (voltage on the section). Setting
parameter, AP: Expert, Yes / No Default No.
[703] Fast test: U min: Voltage value from which the system detects that voltage is present
on the section feeder. (This information is used for a number of func-
tions).
Setting value, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 V. Default: 500 V.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 132 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[704] Fast test: delay : Time figure for how long the parameter Fast test Umin must be ex-
ceeded in order to detect that a voltage is present on the section.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 2 sec-
onds.
6.3 Times
The closure of the circuit breaker with an automatic test system is subject to a time reference
which is set with the following parameters.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
705 Primary pause s EP EXP Setting of the primary pause time before the first test.
706 Test time s EP EXP Setting of how long the test contactor is pulled in and the test runs.
707 Test pause s EP EXP Setting for the pause time between the tests (cooling of the test resis-
tance)
708 Wait time s EP EXP Setting for the waiting time which runs between the successful test and
the closure.
709 Test extension s EP EXP Time period after the closure which in the case of a trip appends the test
to the last test cycle executed.
710 Test cycles - EP EXP Maximum number of test cycles.

[705] Primary pause: Waiting period in seconds before first test.


Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 5 sec-
onds, Range 3-30 seconds.
[706] Test time : Test duration in seconds.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 2 sec-
onds, Range 1-8 seconds.
[707] Test pause : Test pause time in seconds.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 second, Default: 15
seconds, Range 10-30 seconds.
[708] Wait time : Waiting time before closure
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, resolution: 1 second, Default: 3 sec-
onds, Range 1-10 seconds.
[709] Test extension: Extension of precondition for closure.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution; 1 second, Default: 5 sec-
onds, Range 1-10 seconds
[710] Test cycles : Number of test cycles which are to be executed.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, resolution: 1, Range: 0-8, Default: 3
6.4 Limits
The closure of the circuit breaker with automatic testing is subject to limits which are set and dis-
played with the following parameters:

VT39DR Page 133 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
712 U min section V EP EXP Residual voltage expected during testing of the section with residual volt-
age detection.
713 R min section Ω EP EXP Residual resistance expected during testing of the section with residual
resistance determination.
714 Test voltage V BP BEO Measured test voltage from last test.
716 R section Ω BP BEO Calculated residual resistance from the last test.
717 I test A BP BEO Measured test current of last test.

[712] U min section: Comparison value for the residual voltage detection for the section
test.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01V.
[713] R min section: Comparison value for the residual resistance detection for the section
test.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01 ohm.
[714] Test voltage: Last measurement for the residual voltage detection in the section
test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01V.
[716] R section : Last calculated value for the residual resistance detection in the sec-
tion test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01 ohm
[717] I test : Last measurement of the test current for the residual resistance de-
tection in the section test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01A.
6.5 Status
In this subgroup the statuses of the protective unit with its control function can be considered.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
718 SM: sect. feeder - BP BEO Feeder control status message. Gives the state in which the control is
operating. (OFF, ON, test, close, open, ...)
719 SM: test - BP BEO Test run status message (test, test pause, ...), when the test runs. The
message STOP occurs on termination of the test.
720 SM: close - BP BEO Status messages for closure when the closure runs. The message STOP
feeder occurs on termination of the closure.
721 SM: open feeder - BP BEO Status messages for opening when the opening operation runs. After ter-
mination of opening the STOP message occurs.
729 Status: test time s BP BEO Display of the total test time for the last test.

[718] SM sect. feeder : Shows the status of the overall feeder control. Observing parameter,
AP: Observe, Status: On, Off, Test, Close, Open.
[719] SM: test : Shows the status of the feeder control in partial status Test in more
detail. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Status : Test, Test pause.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 134 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[720] SM: close feeder : Shows the status of the feeder control in partial status Close in more
detail. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Status: Close, Run-time
monitoring.
[721] SM: open feeder : Shows the status of the feeder control in the partial status Open in
more detail. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Status: Open, Run-
time monitoring.
[729] Status: test time : Total running time of the test in seconds, Observing parameter, AP:
Observe, Resolution: 1 second

VT39DR Page 135 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Chronological test sequence


In the time diagrams below the following situation is assumed as the starting point in time:
• Protective CB trip or
• Command CB ON after command CB OFF

i.e. 0/1 edge of the precondition.

S tro re d
stan d ard va lu e

5 HFRP P HQGHG B re ak er
UDQJH o pe ra tin g tim e

S ho rt circ uit
P re co nd ition
[P 72 9] S ta tu s: te st tim e   !  V

[P 70 5] P rim a ry pa use      V 5 s


(driv e to te st
[P 70 6] T es t tim e c ontactor)       V 2 s
[P 70 7] P au s e      V 10 s
N o sh o rt circu it o n section
S h ort cc t. fre e d e la y p er. fixed 0.7 s
[P 72 0] P a use b efo re O N     V 3 s
O: C B O N sig n al
I: S ec tio n b re ak er O N
(bloc king )
O: S ig na l, su stain e d sh ort c irc u it
E xten . o f p re con dit.     V 5 s
N u m be r o f test       3
I: C B O N co m m an d
(D eb lo ck in g )
O: C B O ff c o m m a n d

I: Inp ut
O : O utp ut
1 234 56 7

Fig. 45: Sequence for no short circuits

Sequence with no short circuits present:


Start of the total running time and primary pause.
1. Section free of short circuits.
2. After expiry of the short-circuit-free delay-period cancellation of the test time and activation of
test contactor because section has no short circuits.
3. After expiry of the waiting period before CB ON, activation of the section breaker ON and start
of the extension of the precondition.
4. After CB operating time, removal of the precondition and CB On deactivation, because CB has
closed.
5. After expiry of precondition extension, stopping of total running time.
6. After expiry of the primary pause, start of the test time and activation of test contactor.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 136 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Stored
standartd value

5HFRPPHQGHG Breaker
UDQJH operating time

Short circuit
Precondition
[P729] Status: test time !V

[P705] Primary pause V 5s


(drive to test
[P706] Test time contactor) V 2s
[P707] Pause V 10 s
No short circuit on section
Short cct. free delay per. fixed 0.7 s
[P720] Pause before ON V V

O: CB ON signal
I: Section breaker ON
O: Signal, sustained short circuit (Blocking)
Exten. of precondit.V 5s
Number of test  3
I: CB ON command
O: CB OFF command (Deblocking)

I: Input
O:Output
1 2 3 4 56 78 9

Fig. 46: Sequence for a temporary short circuit

Sequence for temporary short circuit


1. Start of total running and primary pause.
2. After expiry of the primary pause, start of the test time and activation of the test contactor.
3. After expiry of the test time, start of the test pause and deactivation of the test contactor.
4. After expiry of the test pause, renewed start of the test time and activation of the test contac-
tor.
5. Section has no short circuits.
6. After expiry of the short-circuit-free delay-period cancellation of the test time and deactivation
of the test contactor, because section is free of short circuits.
7. After expiry of the waiting period before CB ON, activation of section breaker ON and start of
the extension of the precondition.
8. After the CB operating time, removal of the precondition and CB ON deactivation, because CB
has closed.
9. After expiry of the precondition extension, stopping of the total running time.

VT39DR Page 137 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Stored
standard value
5HFRPPHQGHG
UDQJH

Short circuit
Precondition

[P729] Status: test time !V

[P705] Primary pause V 5s


drive to test
[P706] Test time contactor) V 2s
[P707] Pause V 10 s
No short circuit on section
Short cct. free delay per. fixed 0.7 s
[P720] Pause before ON V V

O: CB ON signal
I: Section breaker ON
O: Signal, sustained short circuit (Blocking)
Exten. of precondit.V 5s
Number of test  3
I: CB ON command
O: CB OFF command (Deblocking)

I: Input
O: Output
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Fig. 47: Sequence for sustained short circuit

Sequence for a sustained short circuit


1. Start of the total running time and primary pause following the CB tripping.
2. After expiry of the primary pause, start of the test time and activation of the test contactor.
3. After expiry of the test time, start of the test pause and deactivation of the test contactor.
4. After expiry of the test pause, renewed start of the test time and activation of the test contac-
tor.
5. Repetition of steps 3 and 4 till expiry of the total running time.
6. Signalling of sustained short circuit, automatic test and reclosing system is reset.

If a sustained short circuit is present, it must be unblocked, before the CB can be closed.
7. This is carried out with the CB OFF command.
8. Automatic test system runs again.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 138 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 6IPMEFMPMX]WEJIX]
Each section panel is controlled by a separate SITRAS DPU96. This gives the overall system a high
reliability.
An additional increase in the system availability is achieved by the following measures:
• SITRAS DPU96 overload and temperature protected output signals.
• Fault diagnosis of especially critical output signals.
• System monitoring

VT39DR Page 139 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Fault diagnosis of especially critical output signals


The control signals for CB ON and test contactor ON are output to the process via a DO which can
be checked diagnostically. Through the diagnostic function integrated into the operating system
the program detects if a short circuit is present in the output circuit of the board (conducting, failed
output circuit). With diagnosed short circuit the output signals “CB ON”. “Test contactor ON” and
the activation of the series connected enable signal are blocked by the program.
An assumed output fault on the DO is therefore detected and overcome with the process re-
maining safe. (Fig. 48, page 140)
This detected fault is signalled and displayed.
Due to the signal on detection of the fault, the availability of the system can be substantially in-
creased.

Safety tripping on detecting


Output fault 1

Sicherheitsabschaltung
bei erkanntem Ausgangsfehler 1
L+ Test contactor on CB ON Enable
Prüfschütz LS Freigabe
EIN EIN

Fig. 48: Block diagram of the system monitoring

The SITRAS DPU96 application program detects process irregularities, signals them in a defined
manner via the Profibus interface and produces a field related group message.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 140 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 %YXSQEXMSR

 4VMRGMTPIWXVYGXYVI
The inputs carry measurements, pulses for intermediate steps, etc. whereas the outputs are as-
signed to actions, displays, etc. for the automatic system. Markers are set which save the relevant
states for internal data storage before, during and after the running of the automation program.

Inputs Outputs

$XWRPDWLRQVWDWXV
GLVSOD\HG
ZLWKVWDWHJUDSK

Markers

Fig. 49: Automation system

 %YXSQEXMSRWXEXIW
The automation sequence features defined states. Functions are allocated to these states which
run when the corresponding state is reached.

VT39DR Page 141 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Displays

'LVSOD\QDPH

6HFWLRQFRQWURO

VWDWXV

7HVWWLPH

1XPEHURI

H[SLUHGWHVW

F\FOHV

Fig. 50: Operation window: 1.5 Section

The first line contains the display name. The second line gives information about the momentary
automation status. Here, the label “C” signifies that the automation is currently testing. The third
line indicates the total test time and in the fourth line the number of expired test cycles is given.
Note:
In the following illustrations and descriptions of the states, the following symbols are used:
Interrogation Action or message Main program status Begin

Einschalten
Yes Stop P1 P1
CB ON

No

(Yes/No need not (Text may change) (Text may change)


appear)

Interrogations which are apparently active simultaneously are always linked through an “OR” op-
eration. “AND conditions” are labelled with “+” or “And”.
Explanation:
Automatic: Automatic test and reclosing system
ON = CB ON
OFF = CB OFF

SITRAS DPU96 Page 142 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Sequence for network closure:

OFF

Network ON Marker for ON


last status

OFF

Automatic OFF TEST

SWITCH OFF No
CBK CB ON

Yes

CBK CB ON SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 51: Network closure

Sequence for network closure:


First the last saved internal device status is called. Here, there are two possibilities:
• CB was not closed, then: Automatic off
SWITCH OFF (Program) start ⇒ OFF
• CB was closed, then: Check end position
For end position On ⇒ Status CB ON
For other end positions ⇒ SWITCH OFF ⇒ OFF

VT39DR Page 143 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Sequence during the Off state:

OFF

Direct ON ON Automatic
Reset errors
command command ON

Automatic
TEST
ON

Automatic
SWITCH OFF Precondition test
OFF

Check

SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 52: Monitoring in the Off state.

The saved fault messages are interrogated and reset:


• Insulation fault
• Checkback fault
• Disconnect delay expired

The following commands initiate a status change:


• Direct ON command ⇒ Automatic OFF and SWITCH ON
• ON command ⇒ Automatic On and precondition test
• Automatic ON ⇒ Precondition test

SITRAS DPU96 Page 144 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Precondition sequence:
Definition of opening condition (OR criterion):
• Frame fault trip = Automatic OFF
• Cable fault trip = Automatic OFF
• Intertrip blocking by neighbouring substation = Automatic OFF
• No enable of bypass disconnector (hand crank not o.k.) = Automatic OFF
• Truck position fault = Automatic OFF
• CB fault = Automatic OFF
• External switch-off (inputs 16-20 parameterisable)

Definition of precondition for CB closure (AND criterion):


• Automatic operation on
• Checkback CB is off
• No cable temperature trip (Difference between trip temperature and hysteresis must be un-
dercut)
• No intertrip signal from neighbouring substation
• External precondition present (inputs 16-20 parameterisable)

Following conditions cause a change of status:


• Switch-off condition is applied ⇒ OFF (CB Off)
• No Off condition is present (protective trip) and precondition for switching on the CB is fulfilled
⇒ Check

VT39DR Page 145 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Sequence during the fast test:

OFF

Fast
test ON + No
Check Condition TEST
fulfilled

Yes

(via path E2)


SWITCH OFF SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 53: Check

The following conditions cause a change of state from checking via E2 to switch on:
• Fast test switched on [702]
• Voltage Umin [703] exceeded for the duration [704].

If the above conditions are not satisfied, there is a change of state from voltage check to line test.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 146 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Testing:

OFF
Test sequence

SWITCH OFF

Test Stop TEST

Message
sustained
short circuit

SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 54: Testing

The following conditions (OR criterion) cause a change of state:


• Off condition is present or CB precondition is not satisfied ⇒ SWITCH-OFF is activated
(cancellation condition)
• Switch-off condition is present ⇒ SWITCH OFF is activated (cancellation condition)
• Intertripping signal is present ⇒ SWITCH OFF is activated (cancellation condition)
• CB trip is present ⇒ Breaker operation is activated (cancellation condition)

If the above conditions are not satisfied, the detailed test sequence is activated in the test state.
The dashed test sequence in Fig. 54 on page 147 is fully described in Fig. 55 on page 148.

VT39DR Page 147 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Test sequence:

P1 P2

Test lamp Test lamp


flashes flashes

Await expiry Await expiry


of primary of primary
pause pause

Test start

Start test
time at least SWITCH ON
700 ms

Await test
Stop test
time

No short
Yes Positive test Pause before
circuit on
message ON
sections

No

Number
Expiry of Negative test No
of test cycles
thest time message
reached

Yes
Message:
Sustained short Lamp OFF Stop test
circuit

Fig. 55: Test sequence

SITRAS DPU96 Page 148 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

If the cancellation conditions are not satisfied, the detailed test sequence (test path P1 or P2) is
activated in the test state.
Test path P1:
• Await primary pause.
• Test start (enable contactor and test contactor are switched on).

Test path P2:


Await test pause.
• Test start (enable contactor and test contactor is switched on).

The rest of the test sequence is identical for test sequences P1 and P2:
• Test time of at least 700ms (default) runs.

then
• Interrogation of section test (test for short circuits).
• System message: Test OK.
• Switch off test contactor.
• Increment test cycle counter.
• Waiting period before switch-on expired
• Test stop
• Switch-on

or
• Interrogation of section test (test for short circuits).
• System message: Section test negative
• Enable test contactor / Enable contactor
• Increment test cycle
• Interrogation: Number of permissible test cycles reached
if yes: Stop test
Test lamp off
System message: Sustained short circuit
if yes: A repeat test is initiated via P2

VT39DR Page 149 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Sustained short circuit:

OFF

Message:
Sustained short
circuit

Command Reset
Test sequence
OFF local precondition
CHECK

SWITCH OFF SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 56: Sustained short circuit.

The following conditions (OR criterion) are tested:


• Off command
• Precondition not fulfilled

If the above conditions are fulfilled, the Sustained short circuit message is reset and changes to
the status Off.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 150 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Switch-on:

OFF

CHECK

Can-
Yes
SWITCH OFF cellation
condition

No

SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 57: Switch-on

The following conditions (OR criterion) are tested:


• Off condition is present.
• Switch-off condition is present.
• Intertripping.

If the above conditions are fulfilled, the status changes to Switch-off.


If the above conditions are not fulfilled, the status changes to Switch-on.

VT39DR Page 151 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Switch-on procedure:

E1 E2

ON start

Magnetic Switch-on
Breaker type Test via P2
pulse

Electrical

Switch-on
Bridge economy Stop
resistor (pulse) and
switch-on comman
No

Await breaker Unsuccessful Yes Test cycles


operation time switch-on attempt expired

Breaker
No CBK CB No
CBK CB OK operating ON and OFF
time expired

Yes Yes

Message:
Fault breaker
Breaker
checkback
switched on
signal

Precondition, await
CB ON Yes Yes
via path E1
expiry of time CB ON ON
extension

No No

Breaker
ON STOP ON
fault

Fig. 58: Switch-on procedure

SITRAS DPU96 Page 152 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

First an interrogation is made of from which input the switch-on procedure has been initiated. This
does not however have any influence on the sequence, but instead is only noted in the event
memory.
The following actions / interrogations are carried out:
• Start of switch-on.
• Breaker type, interrogation result magnetic (sets enable contactor, switch-on pulse)
• Breaker type, interrogation result electrical (sets enable contactor, sets hold contactor, bridg-
ing pulse)
• Monitor breaker operation time
• Interrogation CBK CB on
if yes: Message CB on
Switch-on via path E1
if yes: Await precondition time extension
CB on
if yes: Status change after On
if no: Breaker fault
if no: Status change after On
if no: Await breaker operation time
CBK CB On and Off
if yes: Fault CBK CB
if no: Await test cycles
if yes: Message of unsuccessful switch-on attempt
if no: Switch-on stop
Status change after test via P2

VT39DR Page 153 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

ON:

OFF

SWITCH OFF CHECK

Automatic Breaker
ON operation

Automatic OFF
CBK CB Cancellation
and ON CB CBK fault
command switch OFF condition

ON SWITCH ON

Fig. 59: On

The following conditions are tested:


• Automatic Off and On command ⇒ Sets automatic On
• CBK fault ⇒ Automatic Off, switch-off is activated
• CBK CB Off⇒ Breaker operation / trip by static tripping device
• ⇒ Change to switched-off status
• Off condition is present ⇒ Change to state switched-off status = Cancellation
condition
• Switch-off condition is present ⇒ Change to switched-off status = Cancellation condition
• Intertripping signal is present ⇒ Change to switched-off condition = Cancellation cond.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 154 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Unsuccessful switch-on attempt:

OFF

CB OFF
command

Unsuccessful
Reset
switch-on CHECK
precondition
attempt

SWITCH ON

ON

Fig. 60: Unsuccessful attempt at switch-on

The following conditions (OR criterion) are tested:


• Off command ⇒ Status change after Off.
• Precondition not fulfilled ⇒ Status change after Off.

VT39DR Page 155 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Switch-off:

OFF

OFF start

Switch-off Breaking hold Await breaker


CHECK
pulse circuit operating time

Magnetic

Await
Electrical
Breaker type breaker
reaction

CB Yes
SWITCH OFF
CBK OFF

No
Switch off
repeat

Fig. 61: Switch-off

The following conditions are tested:


• Type of breaker, interrogation result magnetic (sets switch-off pulse)
• Type of breaker, interrogation result electrical (resets enable contactor / hold contactor)
• Monitor breaker operating time
• Interrogation CBK CB Off
if yes: Change to Off status.
if no: Repeat of switch-off (max. 3x)

SITRAS DPU96 Page 156 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Blocking:

OFF

CB OFF
command

Blocking CHECK

SWITCH OFF

Fig. 62: Blocking

The blocking message must be acknowledged by a CB Off command. This then switches to the
OFF status.

VT39DR Page 157 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 7]WXIQEHETXEXMSR
Enabling the inputs to a preassigned function allocation for use of system specific signals for the
automation is possible via parameters (the following parameter settings can be set in the sub-
group 4.3 I/O assignment in the main group 4. System data):
4.3 I/O assignment
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
722 Input I 16 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
723 Input I 17 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.

724 Input I 18 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
725 Input I 19 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
726 Input I 20 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for a high signal (1-signal) on this input.
727 Output O 5 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for this output.
728 Output O 9 - EP EXP Setting of the operating principle for this output.

[722] Input I 16: Selection parameter for using the variable input: Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection
Message : Message via Profibus
Open Direct 1: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 2: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 3: Tripping of section feeder
Open Direct 4: Tripping of section feeder
Open Autom. 1: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 2: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 3: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Open Autom. 4: Tripping of the section feeder with auto. trip
Precond. 1: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 2: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 3: Precondition signal must be present for test
Precond. 4: Precondition signal must be present for test
Bypass disco.: Enable of bypass disconnector control (only for follo-
wing option)
Inp hand cra: Hand crank signal Open bypass disconnector not con-
nected (only for option Bypass disconnector interlocking and enable
(E10433-E9705-F003)
Open Block 1: Tripping of section feeder with blocking.
Open Block 2: Tripping of section feeder with blocking.
Cable 1 Enable: Enable signal for Cable Monitor Module 1
Cable 2 Enable: Enable signal for Cable Monitor Module 2
[723] Input I 17: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[724] Input I 18: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]

SITRAS DPU96 Page 158 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[725] Input I 19: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[726] Input I 20: Selection parameter for using the variable input. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [722]
[727] Output O 5: Selection parameter for using the variable output. Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection]
Command PROFI : Command via Profibus
Inhibit bypass: Inhibit on bypass disconnector control (only for option
Bypass disconnector interlock and enable.
(E10433-E9705-F003)
Cable insulat: Cable insulation message
Warn cable te: Warning cable temperature
Warning: Group message warning
Cable S-W: Cable insulation fault screen-wire
Cable S-E: Cable insulation fault screen-earth
Cable meas. fault: Cable insulation measurement fault
Cable screen: Cable insulation fault screen break
Cable trip: Trip by cable monitor module
Cable mess.: Warning message by cable monitor module
Umin: U<Umin: Feeder voltage lower than Umin
Umax: U>Umax: Feeder voltage higher than Umax
Blocking: Feeder is blocked.

[728] Output O 9: Selection parameter for using the variable output; Setting parameter,
AP: Expert, Selection see [727]

 3TXMSRWJSVXLIGSRXVSPJYRGXMSR7IGXMSRJIIHIVTERIP
The following additional functions are possible:

 -RXIVXVMTTMRKJYRGXMSR
The functions “Intertripping by neighbouring substation” and “Blocking by neighbouring substa-
tion” (frame fault) are initiated by the same hardware signal. It depends on the time duration of
this signal which of the two is activated.
Timing with intertripping by neighbouring substation:

Intertripping signal from neighbouring substation


250 ms
An intertrip from the neighbouring substation is present, because the signal is present for shorter
than 500 ms.
Reaction of the section panel control:
• The CB is tripped
• then the automatic test and reclosing system operates and the automatic system remains ac-
tivated.

VT39DR Page 159 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

Time with blocking by frame fault:

Block.sig. from frame fault prot. unit in neigh-


bouring substation

Signal "Block. by neighbouring substation“ >500 ms

Blocking by the neighbouring substation is present, because the signal is present for longer than
500 ms.
Reaction of the section feeder panel control:
• The CB is switched off
• the automatic test and reclosing system is deactivated.
It can be activated again by a ON command when the fault has been rectified and the frame
fault protective unit has been acknowledged.

 &]TEWWHMWGSRRIGXSVPSGOERHIREFPI
This function facilitates the locking and enabling of the feeder disconnector associated with the
feeder breaker and of the evaluation of the signals from the hand crank. For this, two variable in-
puts and one variable output are used.
Enabling of the bypass disconnector control by
Input X: Bypass disconnector in OFF position and
no blocking from the bypass disconnector control (hardware coupling)
Input Y: Hand crank on bypass disconnector is not inserted.
Output Z: Blocking of bypass disconnector control
X,Y = {E16,...E20}
Z = {A5, A6}
With the following faults blocking of the bypass disconnector (variable output [727] or [728]) oc-
curs through the section panel:
• Tripping, cable fault wire-screen
• Tripping, cable temperature
• Intertripping signal from neighbouring substation
• Automatic on
• Sustained short circuit
• CB ON activated

SITRAS DPU96 Page 160 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 8IWXGYVVIRXHIXIGXMSRVIWMHYEPVIWMWXERGIHIXIVQMREXMSR
This function requires the buffer amplifier (E10433-E9709-H200) in the extended version.
With this buffer amplifier a test shunt can be connected. This means that test current can be
measured and, together with the measured test voltage, the section residual resistance deter-
mined.
Limits

No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description


e cess
level
712 U min section V EP EXP Residual voltage expected during testing of the section with residual volt-
age detection.
713 R min section Ω EP EXP Residual resistance expected during testing of the section with residual
resistance determination.
714 Test voltage V BP BEO Measured test voltage from last test.
716 R section Ω BP BEO Calculated residual resistance from the last test.
717 I test A BP BEO Measured test current of last test.

[712] U min section: Comparison value for the residual voltage detection for the section
test.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01V.
[713] R min section: Comparison value for the residual resistance detection for the section
test.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01 ohm.
[714] Test voltage: Last measurement for the residual voltage detection in the section
test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01V.
[716] R section : Last calculated value for the residual resistance detection in the sec-
tion test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01 ohm
[717] I test : Last measurement of the test current for the residual resistance de-
tection in the section test.
Observing parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 0.01A.
In addition the following parameters must be set:
From the group “Basic data”
[715] Test shunt : Replication of the test current measurement for internal calculation
Example: Shunt: 120A /60mV
Setting: [715] = 120A/60mV = 2.00A/mV
From the group “Test method”
[701] Section test: Selection parameter residual voltage detection / residual resistance
detection, Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection

VT39DR Page 161 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 'EFPIQSRMXSVMRKJYRGXMSR[MXL7-86%7(49'-

 (IWGVMTXMSRSJXLIETTPMGEXMSR
The power transfer between the substation and the section feeder for metro and rapid transit
railways with DC drives often occurs using screened power cable. A closed screen is in this case
located between the actual wire and the outer insulation as with a coaxial cable. Fig. 63 shows the
composition of this type of cable in cross-section.

Wire
Inner insulation

Screen

Outer insulation

Fig. 63: Feeder cable cross-section

In order to ensure the operational reliability of the cable and to be able to replace the cable
promptly with ageing, the inner insulation resistance (wire ⇔ screen) and the outer insulation re-
sistance (screen ⇔ earth) are separately measured and evaluated. In addition a short circuit as
occurs between the wire and the screen when damage is caused, e.g. due to an excavator, should
be measured, where possible, separately and quickly to switch off the voltage in the cable. Fig. 64
shows the electrical equivalent circuit for the cable.

Wire (w)

Rws Cws

Screen (s)

Rse Cse

Earth (e)

Fig. 64: Equivalent circuit of feeder cable

In parallel to the two insulation resistances there are cable capacitances (about 1µF/km) between
the wire and screen and between the screen and earth. For protection against electric shock the
voltage between the screen and earth must not exceed the VDE limits when in operation.
Apart from the insulation resistances, monitoring of the screen is often required, i.e. a checkback
message of whether the screen at the end of the cable is still connected to the beginning of the
cable. Damage to the screen can have serious consequences as no measurement of the insulation
resistance can be carried out for this cable section.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 162 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 7-86%7(49'-'EFPI1SRMXSVMRK1SHYPI

 1IEWYVIQIRXQIXLSH
With the SITRAS® DPU96 CI the main feature is that the series resistance is replaced by a regu-
lated voltage source and the equalising current between the cable and the monitoring unit is
evaluated as the measurement quantity. Fig. 65 shows the basic structure for the implementation.

Wire (w)

Rws Cws Rvl

Screen (s) Idiff

Rse Cse Uset

Earth (e)

Cable Monitoring unit

Fig. 65: Cable measurement method

In order to enable an absolute measurement of the resistance values with any ratios and values of
the insulation resistances Rws and Rse, the voltage is switched between two values, e.g. 20V and
60V. This produces different currents between the cable and the monitoring unit. Both insulation
resistances Rws and Rse can be calculated as absolute values from the current values, the corre-
sponding voltage values as well as the wire and wire-to-earth voltages.

 7GVIIRQSRMXSVMRKERHFVIEOEKI

Wire (w)

Rws Cws Rvl

Screen (s) Idiff Itest

Rse Cse Uset

Earth (e)

Cable Monitoring unit

Fig. 66: Cable screen monitoring

Using current sources, which can be switched in as required, an additional current Itest is fed into
the cable at the end of the screen at the end of a normal measurement cycle (measurement of the
current I diff at two different screen / wire-to-earth voltages Uset). The measured values for the
current Idiff should therefore change. If there are no changes, then this is a clear indication that
there is no connection between the two ends of the screen.

VT39DR Page 163 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 &PSGOHMEKVEQHIWGVMTXMSRSJGMVGYMX
The monitoring unit for realising the new functions has the following structure.

Wire

Rs

Rtest
End of screen

A
D
Optical fibre
cable
Micro-
30V DC Supply controller
DC
Rmeas
Screen start

Uset
Voltage Uok
regulator Uover

Protection

Uact

Fig. 67: Block diagram

The signals and function blocks occurring within this structure have the following meanings:
• Rs: Series resistance connected to the wire for supplying the circuit and for feeding the insu-
lation resistance between the screen and the earth.
• Rtest: Resistance through which an additional current is coupled to the end of the screen. It is
used in conjunction with the switch for screen monitoring.
• 30V source with DC/DC converter: Supplies the complete circuit with power.
• Voltage regulator with screen ⇔ earth voltage source: Produces an injected voltage between
screen and earth. Apart from the control signal for the voltage source, the voltage regulator
also supplies the signals of whether the set voltage value Uset has already been reached and
whether an overvoltage is present due to a wire ⇔ screen short circuit.
• Protection: Protective circuit to protect the voltage source against overvoltages when a wire
⇔ screen short circuit occurs with a screen / earth voltage of up to 3kV.
• Microcontroller: Controls the measurement procedure (measurement of Idiff at two different
Uset voltages), screen monitoring, evaluation of the status signals from the voltage regulator
and monitoring of the measurement circuit. The information (currents and status messages)
are transferred as messages to the buffer amplifier and then via an optical fibre cable to the
higher level controller / protective unit which calculates the individual resistances from the raw
data and initiates further actions (e.g. isolation of the section) according to the status.

When voltage is present on the cable monitoring module and the cable monitoring is switched on,
this monitoring function operates. The average over a timer period of about 20 seconds is formed
from a number of consecutive measurements.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 164 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

When the module fails, the fault is detected and signalled.


The short circuit between the wire and screen is detected and evaluated without any delay.

 4EVEQIXIVWSJXLIGEFPIQSRMXSVMRKQSHYPI
The following parameters can be set for the relevant application:
The following basic settings must be set under the system windows.
4.2 Protective reactions
The connection of the cable monitoring module is described in Chapter 5.
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
330 Reaction S-W EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).
331 Reaction S-E EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).
332 React screen EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
mon. trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).
333 Reaction meas- - EP EXP Selection of which reaction is to follow in the case of a fault. Message or
ure trip with blocking of the section feeder (cable monitoring option).

[330] Reaction S-W : Selection parameter for dealing with an insulation fault between
screen and conductor. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection of
Message / Trip. For the Trip setting the breaker is tripped in addition
to the message and the section feeder is blocked.
[331] Reaction S-E : Selection parameter for dealing with an insulation fault between
screen and earth. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection of Mes-
sage / Trip. For the Trip setting the breaker is tripped in addition to
the message and the section feeder is blocked.
[332] React. screen mon. : Selection parameter for driving the screen monitor. Feeder breaker
setting parameters, AP: Expert, Selection without monitoring with
screen feedback, e.g. with parallel cables or via a defined termination
resistance at the end of the feeder line between screen and conduc-
tor with a value of approx. 1.2 MΩ.
[333] Reaction measure: Selection parameters for dealing with faults from measurement inter-
ference on the cable monitor module. Setting parameter, AP: Expert,
Selection Message / Trip. With the Trip setting the breaker is tripped
in addition to the message and the section feeder is blocked.

VT39DR Page 165 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

5.6 Cable insulat.


No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
300 Isol. Cable 1 EP STA Switches cable monitor module 1 on and off
301 Isol. Cable 2 EP STA Switches cable monitor module 2 on and off
302 Cable 1: Status BP STA Cable monitor module 1 status message.
303 Cable 2: Status BP STA Cable monitor module 2 status message.
304 Cable 1:R(S- kOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and wire in Feeder cable 1
W)act
305 Cable 2:R(S- kOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and wire in Feeder cable 2
W)act
306 Cable 1:R(S- KOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and earth in Feeder cable 1
E)act
307 Cable 2:R(S- kOhm BP BEO Insulation resistance between screen and earth in Feeder cable 2
E)act
308 Cable 1:R(S- kOhm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire in
W)min Feeder cable 1
309 Cable 2:R(S- Ohm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire in
W)min Feeder cable 2
310 Cable 1:R(S- kOhm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth in
E)min Feeder cable 1
311 Cable 2:R(S- kOhm EP STA Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth in
E)min Feeder cable 2
312 Cable 1: Meas. BP EXP Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for Feeder cable 1
313 Cable 2: Meas. A BP EXP Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for Feeder cable 2
703 Fast test: U min V EP EXP Voltage limit on the section feeder.

[300] Isol. cable 1: Selection parameter of whether Cable monitor module No. 1 is
evaluated. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[301] Isol. cable 2: Selection parameter of whether Cable monitor module No. 2 is
evaluated. Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Selection
[302] Cable 1 status : Observing parameter in which status Cable monitor module No. 1 is
operating. Observing parameters AP: Observe, Status faulty, active
....
[303] Cable 2 status : Observing parameter in which status Cable monitor module No. 2 is
operating. Observing parameters AP: Observe, Status faulty, active
....
[304] Cable 1:R(S-W)act: Insulation resistance between screen and wire in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[305] Cable 2:R(S-W)act: Insulation resistance between screen and wire in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[306] Cable 1:R(S-E)act: Insulation resistance between screen and earth in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ

SITRAS DPU96 Page 166 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

[307] Cable 2:R(S-E)act: Insulation resistance between screen and earth in the feeder cable.
Observing parameters, AP: Observe, Resolution: in kΩ
[308] Cable 1:R(S-W)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[309] Cable 2:R(S-W)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and wire
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[310] Cable 1:R(S-E)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[311] Cable 2:R(S-E)min: Comparison value for insulation resistance between screen and earth
for the feeder cable.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[312] Cable 1: meas : Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for the feeder
cable. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution: x,y
X is no. of successful measurements, Y is no. of unsuccessful meas-
urements. The ratio x/Y should be positive.
[313] Cable 2: meas : Quality of the measurements of insulation resistance for the feeder
cable. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution: x,y
X is no. of successful measurements, Y is no. of unsuccessful meas-
urements. The ratio x/Y should be positive.
[703] Fast test: U min: Voltage value from which voltage present on the section feeder is
detected. (This information is used for a number of functions).
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 volt, Default: 500 V.

NOTE
The protective unit starts the evaluation of the measurements from the cable moni-
toring module at the voltage value Fast test: U min [703].

VT39DR Page 167 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

5.7 Cable screen


No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
320 Screen moni- EP STA Setting for screen monitoring
toring
321 Screen 1 FB act BP STA Status of the screen condition
322 Screen 1 FB min EP STA Minimum limit of the screen condition with screen feedback.
323 Screen 1 R min kOhm EP EXP Minimum limit of the screen condition with termination resistance Module
1
324 Screen 2 R min kOhm EP STA Minimum limit of the screen condition with termination resistance Module
2
325 Screen 1 status BP EXP Status message for Screen monitor module 1
326 Screen 2 status BP EXP Status message for Screen monitor module 2

[320] Screen mon. : Selection parameter for which type of screen monitoring is to be
used. Setting parameter, AP: Expert: Off = No monitoring, FB =
Screen feedback, R = Termination resistance.
[321] Screen 1 FB act: Status of the screen condition in the feeder cable. Observing pa-
rameter, AP: Observe
[322] Screen 1 FB min: Comparison value for screen feedback (tolerance setting).
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution:
[323] Screen 1 R min: Comparison value for termination resistance at the end of Feeder
cable No. 1.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[324] Screen 2 R min: Comparison value for termination resistance at the end of Feeder
cable No. 2.
Setting parameter, AP: Expert, Resolution: kΩ
[325] Screen 1 status : Status of the screen condition in the feeder cable. Observing pa-
rameter, AP: Observe
[326] Screen 2 status : Status of the screen condition in the feeder cable. Observing pa-
rameter, AP: Observe

 4S[IVIRIVK]GEPGYPEXMSR ))*


Power calculation is an additional option to the SITRAS DPU96 unit. It supplies the following val-
ues separately for positive (input) and negative (returned) currents:

 1IERTS[IV
The mean power value is calculated in a resolution of 0.1 kW over an adjustable period. The time
for the formation of the mean power value can be set from 1 minute to 1440 minutes (= 1 day)
using a setting parameter. The mean power value is also updated during the time interval. The
following times apply to the updating interval:
• Time shorter than 60 minutes:
Updating is carried out every minute.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 168 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

• Time longer than 60 minutes:


During the specified time updating of the mean power value occurs between 30 and 60
times. The exact value is calculated internally and is selected by the unit such that the speci-
fied item is obtained as accurately as possible.

 )RIVK]
Apart from the power, the energy is calculated and summed every minute in a resolution of 0.1
kWh. As with a mechanical electricity meter the energy values cannot be deleted except by ini-
tialisation of the protective unit.

 4EVEQIXIVWJSVTS[IVERHIRIVK]GEPGYPEXMSR
2.3 Power
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
400 Traction energy kWh BP BEO Sum of extracted energy
401 Energy recovery kWh BP BEO Sum of recovered energy.
402 Feeder power kW BP BEO Mean of extracted power over the set time of Parameter P404.
403 Power recovery kW BP BEO Mean of recovered power over the set time of Parameter P404.
404 Timebase power - EP EXP Gives the time interval for the power measurement.

[400] Traction energy: Sum of extracted energy, Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Reso-
lution: 0.1 kWh.
[401] Energy recovery: Sum of the recovered energy, Observing parameter, AP: Observe,
Resolution: 0.1 kWh.
[402] Feeder power: Mean of the feeder power over the period set with Parameter [404].
(Parameter in the subgroup 4.1 Basic date).
Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution: 0.1 kW.
[403] Power recovery: Mean of the recovered power over the time set with Parameter
[404]. (Parameter in the subgroup 4.1 Basic date).
Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution: 0.1 kW.
[404] Timebase power: Time interval for the formation of the power mean. Setting parame-
ter, AP: Expert, Resolution: 1 minute, Min: 1, Max: 1440, Default:
15min.
(Parameter in subgroup 4.1 Basic data)

VT39DR Page 169 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Function and Operation

 &VIEOIVWXVIWWMRK

 'EPGYPEXMSR
In order to be able to assess circuit breaker wear, the magnitude of the opening currents are
added and saved. The calculation of the breaking currents is triggered by the following events.
• Protective trip:
With a trip the highest current value in the tripping curve is found and added to the summed
current.
• Switch-off:
When the circuit breaker is switched off, the maximum value during the last 200ms is found
and added to the total.

The displayable limit of the summing parameter cannot be reached according to the maximum
opening currents specified by the manufacturer.
Example:
If about 4000-5000 openings at rated current are taken as the summed loading, then with a rated
current of 2.5 kA a summed current of 10,000-13,000MA is obtained.
After replacement of the breaker contacts, the summed current [13] can be reset to acquire the
loading of the new contacts.
2.5 Switch load
No. Name Unit Typ Ac- Brief description
e cess
level
13 Total current kA BP BEO- Sum of all breaking currents. Reset by Parameter P19.
19 Total current de kA EP EXP- This selection parameter resets Parameters 13 and 37.
37 Breaking current A BP BEO The last breaking current. Can be reset with Parameter P19.

[13] Total current: Sum of all breaking currents since the last time the value was reset
by Parameter [19]. Observing parameter, AP: Observe, Resolution:
1kA.
[19] Total current de: Deletes the sum of all breaking currents. Observing parameter, AP:
Expert, Selection text: Yes/no (parameter in subgroup 8.1 Commis-
sioning).
[37] Breaking current: Shows the last breaking current value. Observing parameter, AP:
Observe, Resolution: 1A.

 'SQQYRMGEXMSR
All communication functions are described in Chap. 6.2.1, from page 115.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 170 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Maintenance

 1EMRXIRERGI

WARNING
When operating the system, it is inevitable that certain parts of the switchgear will
carry a dangerous voltage.
Unless the correct procedures are observed, death or severe personal injury and sub-
stantial damage to the equipment may occur.
When carrying out any maintenance work on this unit, please observe all instructions
contained in this chapter and attached directly to the unit itself.
• The maintenance of the unit should only be carried out by suitably qualified per-
sonnel.
• Only spare parts authorised by the manufacturer should be used.
• It is essential to conform to the specified maintenance intervals and to follow the
instructions for repairs and replacement.

NOTE
The guarantee becomes invalid if the central unit is opened (visible on Seal 1).

 1EMRXIRERGIMRWXVYGXMSRW

 +IRIVEPVIQEVOW
The protective unit, buffer amplifier and voltage divider module should be protected against dirt as
far as possible. Cleaning should only be carried out with the equipment in the dead state.
The unit performs adequate self-tests which produce a system message on the display. Further
responses can be initiated depending on the parameterisation.

 8VMTGMVGYMXXIWX
The trip circuit can be tested at any time by a trip test on the protective unit. This trip circuit test
must be carried out at least every 12 months.

VT39DR Page 171 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Maintenance

This is most easily achieved by activating the trip outputs. The following parameters are provided
in order to carry out this test conveniently and with inclusion of the switching elements in the pro-
tective unit.
[70] Tripping test: If the parameter is set to ON, the trip outputs are activated when the
entry is acknowledged. A message then appears on the display.

 7IVZMGMRK

 7TEVITEVXW
Spare parts and accessories for SITRAS® DPU96 can be obtained under the following order num-
bers:
Product Short description Supplementary text Order number
SITRAS DPU96 PU Basic version V1.0 DC 24-90 V DC without C- E10433-E9502-H101
trip
SITRAS DPU96 PU Basic version V1.0 UC 90-250V without C- E10433-E9502-H111
trip
SITRAS DPU96 PU Basic version V1.0 DC 24-90 V with C-trip E10433-E9502-H100
SITRAS DPU96 PU Basic version V1.0 UC 90-250V with C-trip E10433-E9502-H110
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 DC 24-90 V without C-trip E10433-E9502-H201
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 UC 90-250V without C- E10433-E9502-H211
trip
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 DC 24-90 V with C-trip E10433-E9502-H200
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 UC 90-250V with C-trip E10433-E9502-H210
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 with Profibus connection DC 24-90 V without C-trip E10433-E9702-H201
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 with Profibus connection UC 90-250V without C- E10433-E9702-H211
trip
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 with Profibus connection DC 24-90 V with C-trip E10433-E9702-H200
SITRAS DPU96 PU Extended version V2.0 with Profibus connection UC 90-250V with C-trip E10433-E9702-H210
SITRAS DPU96 BA Buffer amplifier I/U measurement E10433-E9509-H100
SITRAS DPU96 BA Buffer amplifier extended version I/U measurement, I-test, E10433-E9709-H200
cable
SITRAS DPU96 CI Cable monitor module E10433-E9700-H201
SITRAS DPU96 VD Voltage divider module 1000V - 4000V E10433-E9511-H100
SITRAS DPU 96 Optical fibre cable 3.0m E10433-E9502-H500
SITRAS DPU 96 Connector set X2 Process interface E10433-E9502-H510
SITRAS DPU 96 Connector part X1 Power supply interface E10433-E9502-H520
Addit. funct. from Feeder circuit control function Option E10433-E9705-F001
V2.0

Addit. funct. from Intertripping function Option for control funct. E10433-E9705-F002
V2.0
Addit. funct. from Bypass disconnector lock + enable Option for control funct. E10433-E9705-F003
V2.0
Addit. funct. from Test curr. acquisit. / res. resistance meas. Option for control funct. E10433-E9705-F004
V2.0

SITRAS DPU96 Page 172 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Maintenance

Product Short description Supplementary text Order number


Addit. funct. from Time synchronisation Option for PROFIBUS E10433-E9705-F005
V2.0
Addit. funct. from Cable insulation monitoring Option E10433-E9705-F007
V2.0
Addit. funct. from Power / energy calculation Option E10433-E9705-F009
V2.0
Addit. funct. from Storage of breaker stressing Option E10433-E9705-F010
V2.0
SITRAS DPU96-SW PC program Win 95 E10433-E9502-R100
SITRAS DPU 96 Operating instructions V1.0 German A52811-D2325-D11-
A1-0019
SITRAS DPU 96 Operating instructions V1.0 English A52811-D2325-D11-
A1-7619
SITRAS DPU 96 Operating instructions V2.0 German A52811-C4302-D11-
A1-0019
SITRAS DPU 96 Operating instructions V2.0 English A52811-C4302-D11-
A1-7619

= Version 1, still available = Product to be discontinued, replace by basic version


V2.0

 'PIERMRK
Once every year the components must be cleaned with a dry cloth using a mild household
cleaner.

 6ITEMV
First carry out the following tests.

 9RMXXIWXERHQSRMXSVMRKJYRGXMSRW

 7IPJXIWX
After switching on, the unit automatically starts the self-test. Here, the following tests are carried
out:
• EPROM checksum: The program stored in EPROM is secured by a checksum. This enables
the detection of data errors in the memory. If an error is detected, a system message is re-
leased and the unit attempts to go into operation despite the error.
• RAM test : Test of the RAM memory.
The measurement memory is buffered for at least one hour. With the RAM test a check is
made of whether valid measurement information is present in the memory. If no valid infor-
mation is present, the measurement memory is released for writing. If valid information is
found, the content of the measurement memory is retained (e.g. for failure and restoration of
the supply voltage within the buffer period).
With a RAM error a system message is released and the unit attempts to go into operation
despite the error.

VT39DR Page 173 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Maintenance

• EEPROM test: The content of the EEPROM in which the parameter settings are saved is also
secured with a checksum. The data is saved in two identical blocks in the EEPROM. If one
block contains an error, parameters are taken from the block which is still intact. If an errone-
ous checksum is found, a system message is issued. If both blocks are invalid, the default
values are loaded.
• Optical fibre cable: The data transfer from the buffer amplifier to the central unit via the optical
fibre cable is continually monitored. If the link fails, a system message is released. Since the
optical fibre cable is also monitored during operation, the self-test is not cancelled even with a
fault.
• Breaker tripping: When the unit with capacitor tripping is switched on, the capacitors are
charged. They contain the energy for the high-speed tripping of the breaker. If the capacitors
are charged after 6 seconds, the self-test is successful. If this does not happen, then a sys-
tem message is released. Since the capacitor voltage is monitored also during operation, the
self-test is not cancelled even with a fault.

The reaction to a system message during the self-test depends on the value of Parameter [81]
Action system message. Whether the trigger output is activated or not depends on the setting of
this parameter.

 3TIVEXMSR
Diagnostic tests during operation:
• Optical fibre cable: Data transfer from the buffer amplifier via the optical fibre cable is continu-
ously monitored. If the link fails, a system message is released.
• Shunt connection: The buffer amplifier continually checks the connection to the shunt. The
buffer amplifier signals the information to the central unit. If a fault is found, then a system
message is released in the central unit.
• Breaker tripping: The capacitor voltage is continually monitored during operation. If the voltage
falls below the minimum of 220V DC, a system message is released.
• PC link : If an existing link to the PC fails, a warning is displayed.
• Communications link (Extended Level 2): A warning is produced when the communications
link fails.

 -RXIVREP[EXGLHSK
The program cycle time is continually monitored. If it is found that the time has been exceeded
(e.g. due to an internal fault or voltage dip), then the microprocessor is reset. The processor de-
termines whether the program start was caused by the unit being switched on or by the internal
watchdog.
The intervention of the internal watchdog is indicated by a system message. Operation is not in-
terrupted.

 7YTTP]ZSPXEKIJEMPYVI
A failure signal is activated by a monitoring circuit at the latest 10 ms before the power supply
collapses. As a reaction to this, the system saves the most important system information in the
buffered memory area. The memory is protected against uncontrolled writing when the operating
voltage collapses.

SITRAS DPU96 Page 174 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Maintenance

 (MWTEXGLSJHIJIGXMZIGSQTSRIRXW
If despite the above, errors still occur, then please send the components to the following address
for repair:
Siemens AG
ATD TD IT ST
Hr.Meyer/Hr.Karl
Sieboldstraße 4
D-91052 Erlangen
Germany

Please use the sheet from chapter 10.

VT39DR Page 175 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Maintenance

SITRAS DPU96 Page 176 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Disposal and Recycling

 (MWTSWEPERH6IG]GPMRK
The units in this product family have been produced extensively from materials which can be dis-
posed of in an environmentally friendly manner and properly recycled.
A prerequisite for the disposal and recycling is that the units are in a condition corresponding to
correct and proper usage. Unit parts which cannot be recycled must be correctly disposed of.
We can provide help with disposal and recycling. In this respect, please contact your local
Siemens company.

VT39DR Page 177 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Disposal and Recycling

SITRAS DPU96 Page 178 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

 8IGLRMGEP(EXE

 7-86%7(4949'IRXVEP9RMX
Digital inputs 24 inputs DC 24 V
Electrical isolation yes
(one reference point for all digital in-
puts/outputs)
Input voltage (nominal value) DC 24 V
For signal “0“ 0 ... +4 V
For signal “1“ +12 ... +30 V
Input current for signal “1“ typically 1 mA
Delay time typically 3 ms
For “0“ -> “1“
For “1“ -> “0“
Total loading on all inputs 100 %
Digital outputs 1 output for breaker trip DC 24 V
1 thyristor output for breaker trip DC 250 V
Supply for buffer amplifier and other DC 24V DC 24 V max. loadable up to 2.0A
units
16 outputs DC 24 V
Electrical isolation yes
(one reference point for all digital in-
puts/outputs)
Output voltage (nominal value) DC 24 V
For signal “0“ max. +1 V
Residual current for signal “0” max. 0.3 mA
For signal “1“ min. 22 V
Permissible range 0 ... 0.5 A
Total loading on all outputs total 2.5 A
Measurement An optical fibre input for measurement transfer
inputs from buffer amplifier (current and traction volt-
age, other measurements depending on buffer
amplifier)
Analogue outputs 1 output, short-circuit proof, can be allocated to ± 10 V
various measurements
Interfaces RS232 standard interface to PC
Supply voltages
Voltage Band 1 DC: 24 V...90 V +10%, -20%
Voltage Band 2 DC: 90 V..270 V +10%, -20%
AC: 60 V..240 V, 50/60 Hz +10%, -20%
Max. continuous 5A
current
Max. peak current 7.5 A

VT39DR Page 179 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

Max. switch-on 10 A (∆t ≤ 100 ms) (at 24 V DC)


current
Current-time inte- l2 t ≤ 41 A2
gral
Charging pulse

Max. power con- 170 W on loading with 2.0A from 24VDC


sumption

Protection to IEC IP 20
529
Dimensions (B x H 250 x 135 x 140 mm
x T)
Weight 3.2 kg
Minimum separa- top 20mm
tion bottom 50mm
left 10mm
right 10mm
Relative humidity To IEC 721-3-3 (07/95) Class 2
Permissible ambi- Operation: 0°C...+50°C
ent temperature Storage, transport: -25°C...+70°C

 7-86%7(4949'IRXVEP9RMX[MXL4VSJMFYW
Digital inputs 24 inputs DC 24 V
Electrical isolation yes
(one reference point for all digital in-
puts/outputs)
Input voltage (nominal value) DC 24 V
For signal “0“ 0 ... +4 V
For signal “1“ +12 ... +30 V
Input current for signal “1“ typically 1 mA
Delay time typically 3 ms
For “0“ -> “1“
For “1“ -> “0“
Total loading on all inputs 100 %
Digital outputs 1 output for breaker trip DC 24 V
1 thyristor output for breaker trip DC 250 V
Supply for buffer amplifier and other DC 24V DC 24 V max. loadable up to 2.0A
units
16 outputs DC 24 V
Electrical isolation yes
(one reference point for all digital in-
puts/outputs)
Output voltage (nominal value) DC 24 V
For signal “0“ max. +1 V
Residual current for signal “0” max. 0.3 mA
For signal “1“ min. 22 V

SITRAS DPU96 Page 180 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

Permissible range 0 ... 0.5 A


Total loading on all outputs total 2.5 A
Measurement An optical fibre input for measurement transfer
inputs from buffer amplifier (current and traction volt-
age, other measurements depending on buffer
amplifier)
Analogue outputs 1 output, short-circuit proof, can be allocated to ± 10 V
various measurements
Interfaces RS232 standard interface to PC
PROFIBUS DP communications interface to EN 50170 / DIN 19245 Part 3

Supply voltages
Voltage Band 1 DC: 24 V...90 V +10%, -20%
Voltage Band 2 DC: 90 V..270 V +10%, -20%
AC: 60 V..240 V, 50/60 Hz +10%, -20%
Max. continuous 5A
current
Max. peak current 7.5 A
Max. switch-on 10 A (∆t ≤ 100 ms)
current
Current-time inte- l2 t ≤ 41 A2
gral
Charging pulse

Max. power con- 170 W on loading with 2.0A from 24VDC


sumption

Protection to IEC IP 20
529
Dimensions (B x H 250 x 135 x 140 mm
x T)
Weight 3.2 kg
Minimum separa- top 20mm
tion bottom 50mm
left 10mm
right 10mm
Relative humidity To IEC 721-3-3 (07/95) Class 2
Permissible ambi- Operation: 0°C...+50°C
ent temperature Storage, transport: -25°C...+70°C

VT39DR Page 181 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

 7-86%7(49&%&YJJIV%QTPMJMIV&EWMG:IVWMSR
Supply voltage +10/-20 % 24 V DC
Supply current for unloaded outputs 3 128 mA
x 20 mA 175 mA
Inputs
Current measurement via shunt (IN = 60 mV)
DC input voltage 0...+/- 300 mV
Input resistance 546 Ω
Voltage measurement via voltage divider module
DC input voltage 0...+/- 1000 V
(selectable via voltage divider tapping)
0...+/- 2000 V
0...+/- 4000 V
Input resistance with voltage divider module
1.8 – 3.4 MΩ
DC input voltage, buffer amplifier
0...10 V
Input resistance, buffer amplifier
9.2 kΩ
Outputs
Optical fibre message to digital protective unit
± 10 V
Current
± 10 V
Voltage UAU
± 10 V
Test voltage Ut
20 mA
Maximum loading of each output
Rated insulation voltage 4.0 kV
Test voltage 15 kV AC
Ambient temperature 0 °C...60 °C
Protection to IEC 529 IP 40
Dimensions (B x H x T) 100 mm x 73 mm x 121 mm
Weight 420 g
Relative humidity to IEC 721-3-3 (07/95) Class 2
Permissible ambient temperature Operation: 0°C...+50°C

SITRAS DPU96 Page 182 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

 7-86%7(49&%&YJJIV%QTPMJMIV)\XIRHIH:IVWMSR
Supply voltage +10/-20 % 24 V DC
Supply current with unloaded outputs
with 3 x 20 mA loaded 155 mA
outputs
232 mA
Inputs
Current measurement via shunt (IN = 60 mV)
DC input voltage 0...+/- 300 mV
Input resistance 546 Ω
Test current measurement via shunt (IN = 60 mV)
DC input voltage
Input resistance 0...+/- 120 mV
Voltage measurement via voltage divider module > 1MΩ
DC input voltage
(selectable via voltage divider tapping) 0...+/- 1000 V
Input resistance with voltage divider module 0...+/- 2000 V
DC input voltage, buffer amplifier 0...+/- 4000 V
Input resistance, buffer amplifier 1.8 – 3.4 MΩ
Line current inputs for cable monitor module (I = 10mA) 0...10 V
9.2 kΩ
2 units
Outputs
Optical fibre message with all measurements to digital protective unit
± 10 V
Current ± 10 V
Voltage UAU ± 10 V
Test voltage Ut 20 mA
Maximum loading of each output
Rated insulation voltage 4.0 kV
Test voltage (50Hz, 1min) 15 kV AC
Ambient temperature 0 °C...60 °C
Protection to IEC 529) IP 40
Dimensions (B x H x T) 100 mm x 73 mm x 121 mm
Weight 445 g
Relative humidity to IEC 721-3-3 (07/95) Class 2
Permissible ambient temperature Operation: 0°C...+50°C

VT39DR Page 183 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

 7-86%7(49:(:SPXEKI(MZMHIV1SHYPI
Inputs
Input resistance > 1MΩ
Voltage measurement via voltage divider module 0...+/- 1000 V
DC input voltage
(selectable via voltage divider tapping) 0...+/- 2000 V
0...+/- 4000 V
Input resistance, voltage divider module
1.8 – 3.4 MΩ

Accuracy class <0.6% (4kV)


<0.2% (1/2kV)
Ambient temperature 0 °C...60 °C
Protection to IEC 529 IP 40
Dimensions (B x H x T) 100 mm x 73 mm x 121 mm
Weight 250 g

SITRAS DPU96 Page 184 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

 7-86%7(49'-'EFPI1SRMXSV1SHYPI
Supply voltage from the measured up to 1000 V DC
variable up to 2000 V DC

Rated insulation via DC buffer amplifier


Inputs
Insulation measurement
DC input voltage 0...+/- 1000 V
selectable via input terminals 0...+/- 2000 V
Cable wire connection

Cable screen connection 0...60 V


Connection for end of screen

Negative pole connection 0V


Outputs
Serial line current output 0...10 mA
Measurement range
Insulation resistance screen-wire 300kΩ - 20MΩ
Insulation resistance screen-earth 50kΩ - 500kΩ
Measurement accuracy < 5%
Ambient temperature 0 °C...60 °C
Protection to IEC 529 IP 40
Dimensions (B x H x T) 100 mm x 73 mm x 121 mm
Weight 350 g

VT39DR Page 185 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Technical Data

SITRAS DPU96 Page 186 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Problem report form

10 Problem report form


1)
Report No.:
Von/ From: Eingangsvermerk/
Firma/ Department: Incoming reference
Bearbeiter/ Name:
Ort/ Place:
Datum/ Date:

An/ To: Siemens AG Kopien zur Info an:


Dienststelle/ Department: VT 394 Copies for information to:
Bearbeiter/ Name Herr Link
Ort/ Place: 91050 Erlangen
Fax: ++49/9131-26920
Anlagen-Systembezeichnug/ Name of plant: Fehlerart / Type of failure
Auftragskennzeichen/ Order. No.: Hardware
Kunde/ Customer: Software
Produktbezeichnung/ Name of product: Projektierung/ Design
Bestell-Nr./ ID No.: Unbekannt/ Unknown
Gerätenr./Device No.: Dringlichkeit/ Priority
Stichwort/ Item: (Eintrag durch/ Entry by VT Sofort/ Urgent
394)
Bald möglichst/ As soon as possible

Problembeschreibung/ Description of failure

Vermutliche Ursache/ Probable cause

Derzeitige Abhilfe/ Temporary solution

Fehler/ Problem2) Temperaturabhängig/ Caused by temperature:


Dauerhaft/ Permanent Spannungsabhängig/ Caused by voltage:
Sporadisch/Sporadic Stromabhängig/ Caused by current:
Reproduzierbar/ Reproducible Sonstiges/ Others:

J/Y N/N
Produktsicherheit gefährdet/ Product safety of item affected
Personensicherheit gefährdet/ Personal safety affected

1) Vergabe durch VT 394/ Number issued by VT 394


2) Bitte ankreuzen/ Please cross

VT39DR Page 187 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Problem report form

SITRAS DPU96 Page 188 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

11 List of Parameters

11.1 List of parameters (in numerical order)


No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit Main Sub-
group group
1 I act 0 0 0 A 2 1
2 U act 0 0 0 V 2 1
3 ϑcable actual 0 0 0 degrees C 2 1
4 _ϑcable actual 0 0 0 F 2 1
5 Trip counter 0 0 0 None 2 4
6 Trip count.I max 0 0 0 None 2 4
7 Trip count.∆I 0 0 0 None 2 4
8 Trip count.di/dt 0 0 0 None 2 4
9 Trip count.temp. 0 0 0 None 2 4
10 Trip count.reset 0 1 0 None 8 1
11 Trip count.UMZ 0 0 0 None 2 4
12 Operation counter 0 0 0 None 2 4
13 Total current 0 0 0 kA 2 5
14 Max/Min delete 0 1 0 None 8 1
15 Time display 1 86400 1 s 4 1
16 I rms 0 0 0 A 2 1
17 Time basis I rms 1 86400 10 s 4 1
19 Total current de 0 1 0 None 8 1
20 Shunt 1,00 166,67 50,00 A/mV 4 1
21 Voltage divider 10 1000 100 V/V 4 1
22 Analog output 0 19 0 None 4 1
23 Gain analog.out 1 32767 1 None 4 1
25 I thav 0 0 0 A 2 1
26 I max 0 0 0 A 2 2
27 I max r 0 0 0 A 2 2
28 U min 0 0 0 V 2 2
29 U max 0 0 0 V 2 2
30 Analysis start 0 819,1 0 ms 8 4
31 Analysis time -1 819,2 0 ms 8 4
32 Analysis Imax 0 0 0 A 8 4
33 Analysis ∆I 0 0 0 A 8 4
34 Analysis di/dt 0 0 0 A/ms 8 4
35 Analy.time ∆I 0 0 0 ms 8 4
36 Analy.time di/dt 0 0 0 ms 8 4
37 Breaking current 0 0 0 A 2 5
40 Event index 0 999 0 None 8 4

VT39DR Page 189 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit Main Sub-


group group
41 Event type 0 0 0 None 8 4
42 Event value 0 0 0 None 8 4
43 Event date 0 0 0 None 8 4
44 Event time 0 0 0 None 8 4
45 Event status 0 0 0 None 8 4
46 Event type 0 0 0 None 8 4
50 Warn index 0 255 0 None 8 4
51 Warn type 0 0 0 None 8 4
52 Warn value 0 0 0 None 8 4
53 Warn date 0 0 0 None 8 4
54 Warn time 0 0 0 None 8 4
60 Filter time event 0 2 0 None 8 4
61 Filter type event 0 999 0 None 8 4
62 Event memory 0 0 0 None 8 4
65 Filter time warn 0 2 0 None 8 4
66 Filter type warn 0 999 0 None 8 4
67 Alarm memory 0 0 0 None 4 1
70 Tripping test 0 1 0 None 8 3
71 Memory event 0 1 0 None 4 1
72 Memory mode 0 3 0 None 4 1
73 Sampling rate 1 10000 1 None 4 1
74 Memory end 10 750 300 ms 4 1
80 Action trip 0 1 0 None 4 2
81 Action sys.mess 0 1 1 None 4 2
82 Trip block 1x 0 1 0 None 8 1
83 Trip contact 0 1 1 None 4 2
84 Trip 250V DC 0 1 1 None 4 2
85 Current direction 0 2 0 None 4 2
86 Respons.block 1 0 1 0 None 4 2
87 Respons.block 2 0 1 0 None 4 2
88 I max:delay 0 100,0 0 ms 5 1
90 I trip 500 20000 500 A 5 1
91 I trip rev 500 20000 500 A 5 1
92 ∆I trip 100 10000 100 A 5 2
94 ∆I alarm 10 110 80 % 5 2
95 ∆I delay 0 200 0 ms 5 2
96 ∆I di/dt 0 400 4 A/ms 5 2
97 ∆I di/dt durat. 0 40 20 ms 5 2
98 ∆I act 0 0 0 A 2 1
100 di/dt trip 2 200 10 A/ms 5 3
101 di/dt alarm 10 110 80 % 5 3
102 di/dt durat. 10 200 10 ms 5 3
103 di/dt act 0 0 0 A/ms 2 1

SITRAS DPU96 Page 190 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit Main Sub-


group group
109 Temp. unit 0 1 0 None 4 1
110 Cable resistance 0 10,000 0 mOhm/m 5 5
111 Therm.const.cab. 0 30,00 1,00 K/KWsm 5 5
112 Time const.cab 1 1000 200 s 5 5
113 Ambient temp -20 100 40 degrees C 5 5
114 _ambient temp. -4 212 104 F 5 5
115 ϑcable trip 40 200 70 degrees C 5 5
116 _ϑcable trip 104 392 158 F 5 5
117 ϑcable alarm 40 150 60 degrees C 5 5
118 _ϑcable alarm 104 302 140 F 5 5
119 Hyst. cable temp. 1 50 20 degrees C 5 5
120 _hyst.cable temp. 2 90 36 F 5 5
126 UMZ:I> 100 20000 100 A 5 4
127 UMZ:t(I>) 0 320,00 1 s 5 4
128 UMZ:I> rev 100 200,00 100 A 5 4
129 UMZ:t(I> rev) 0 320,00 1 s 5 4
130 Parblock curr. 0 0 0 None 2 1
131 Parblock oper. 0 2 0 None 4 2
132 Copy parblock 0 2 0 None 8 1
134 U min: 0 3600 0 V 5 4
135 U min: time 0 32,00 32,00 s 5 4
136 U min:reaction 0 2 0 None 5 4
137 U max: 0 3600 3600 V 5 4
138 U max: time 0 32,00 32,00 s 5 4
139 U max:reaction 0 2 0 None 5 4
140 Set time 0 23595999 0 None 4 1
141 Set date 1011995 31122250 1011995 None 4 1
144 Password 0 99999999 0 None 8 1
145 Change password 0 99999999 1234 None 4 1
146 Access level 0 2 0 None 8 1
147 Language 0 4 0 None 4 1
148 Access group 0 6 0 None 8 1
149 Baud rate PC 0 2 1 None 4 1
150 Initialize 0 2 0 None 8 1
151 Operating status 0 3 0 None 2 1
152 Offset comp. 0 2 0 None 8 1
158 Options 0 2147483647 0 None 8 3
159 Options input 0 2147483647 0 None 8 3
160 Input 8 to 1 0 0 0 None 8 2
161 Input 16 to 9 0 0 0 None 8 2
162 Input 24 to 17 0 0 0 None 8 2
163 Output 8 to 1 0 255 0 None 8 2
164 Output 16 to 9 0 255 0 None 8 2

VT39DR Page 191 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit Main Sub-


group group
165 Fault filter 1 0 999 0 None 8 3
166 Fault filter 2 0 999 0 None 8 3
167 Fault filter 3 0 999 0 None 8 3
168 Fault filter 4 0 999 0 None 8 3
169 Enable warnings 0 1 0 None 4 1
170 Test mode 0 1 0 None 8 2
171 Action mode 0 1 0 None 8 2
180 Software vers V1 0 0 0 None 8 3
181 Software vers V2 0 0 0 None 8 3
182 Software vers V3 0 0 0 None 8 3
183 SW vers. day 0 0 0 None 8 3
184 SW vers. month 0 0 0 None 8 3
185 SW vers. year 0 0 0 None 8 3
186 Parameter vers.1 0 0 0 None 8 3
187 Parameter vers.2 0 0 0 None 8 3
188 Device identifier 0 99999999 0 None 4 1
189 Buffer amplifier 0 2 0 None 4 1
190 Memory address 0 1215752191 524288 None 8 3
191 Memory date 0 65535 0 None 8 3
300 Isol. cable 1 0 1 0 None 5 6
301 Isol. cable 2 0 1 0 None 5 6
302 Cable1: status 0 0 0 None 5 6
303 Cable2: status 0 0 0 None 5 6
304 Cable1:R(S-W)act 0 0 0 KOhm 5 6
305 Cable2:R(S-W)act 0 0 0 KOhm 5 6
306 Cable1:R(S-E)act 0 0 0 KOhm 5 6
307 Cable2:R(S-E)act 0 0 0 KOhm 5 6
308 Cable1:R(S-W)min 300 20000 300 KOhm 5 6
309 Cable2:R(S-W)min 300 20000 300 KOhm 5 6
310 Cable1:R(S-E)min 49 500 50 KOhm 5 6
311 Cable2:R(S-E)min 49 500 50 KOhm 5 6
312 Cable1: meas. 0 0 0 None 5 6
313 Cable2: meas. 0 0 0 None 5 6
320 Screen monitoring 0 3 0 None 5 7
321 Screen1 FB act -1 1023 0 None 5 7
322 Screen1 FB min 0 1023 0 None 5 7
323 Screen1 R min 500 4000 1200 KOhm 5 7
324 Screen2 R min 500 4000 1200 KOhm 5 7
325 Screen1: status 0 2 0 None 5 7
326 Screen2: status 0 2 0 None 5 7
330 Reaction S-W 0 1 1 None 4 2
331 Reaction S-E 0 1 1 None 4 2
332 React.screen mon 0 1 1 None 4 2

SITRAS DPU96 Page 192 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit Main Sub-


group group
333 Reaction measure 0 1 1 None 4 2
334 Int:mode measure 0 3 0 None 8 3
400 Traction energy 0 0,0 0,0 KWh 2 3
401 Energy recovery 0 0,0 0,0 KWh 2 3
402 Feeder power 0 0,0 0,0 KW 2 3
403 Power recovery 0 0,0 0,0 KW 2 3
404 Timebase power 1 1440 15 min 4 1
500 PROFIBUS-DP 0 2 0 None 7 1
501 PROFIBUS-DPE 0 2 0 None 7 1
502 PROFIBUS:address 0 126 0 None 7 1
503 PROFIBUS-DP:Prof 1 68 68 None 7 1
504 PROFIBUS-DP:stat 0 2147483647 0 None 7 1
520 Int:comm.board 0 100000 0 None 8 3
521 Int:comm.DP_SW 0 0 0 None 8 3
522 Int:comm.version 0 0 0 None 8 3
523 Int:comm.livesig 0 0 0 None 8 3
550 DM: word1 15...8 0 255 0 None 8 2
551 DM: word1 7...0 0 255 0 None 8 2
552 EM: word1 15...8 0 255 0 None 8 2
553 EM: word1 7...0 0 255 0 None 8 2
554 EM: word2 15...8 0 255 0 None 8 2
555 EM: word2 7...0 0 255 0 None 8 2
556 SB: word1 15...8 0 0 0 None 8 2
557 SB: word1 7...0 0 0 0 None 8 2
558 AB: word1 15...8 0 0 0 None 8 2
559 AB: word1 7...0 0 0 0 None 8 2
700 Feeder control 0 1 0 None 4 1
701 Section test 0 1 0 None 6 1
702 Fast test 0 1 1 None 6 2
703 Fast test: U min 0 4000 500 V 6 2
704 Fast test: delay 0 10 2 s 6 2
705 Primary pause 0 9 5 s 6 3
706 Test time 1,0 8,0 2,0 s 6 3
707 Test pause 3 30 10 s 6 3
708 Wait time 1 10 3 s 6 3
709 Test extension 1 10 5 s 6 3
710 Test cycles 1 8 3 None 6 3
711 Feeder type 0 1 1 None 4 1
712 U min section 1 320,00 1,00 V 6 4
713 R min section 1 320,00 1,00 Ohm 6 4
714 Test voltage 0 0,00 0,00 V 6 4
715 Test shunt 0 35,00 2,00 A/mV 4 1
716 R section 0 10000000,00 0,00 Ohm 6 4

VT39DR Page 193 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit Main Sub-


group group
717 I test 0 0 0 A 6 4
718 SM: sect. feeder 0 0 0 None 6 5
719 SM: test 0 0 0 None 6 5
720 SM: close feeder 0 0 0 None 6 5
721 SM: open feeder 0 0 0 None 6 5
722 Input I 16 0 18 0 None 4 3
723 Input I 17 0 18 0 None 4 3
724 Input I 18 0 18 0 None 4 3
725 Input I 19 0 18 0 None 4 3
726 Input I 20 0 18 0 None 4 3
727 Output O 5 0 13 4 None 4 3
728 Output O 9 0 13 0 None 4 3
729 Status:test time 0 0 0 s 6 5
740 Overcurrent trip 0 1 0 None 4 4
741 M:∆I tripping 0 1 0 None 4 4
742 M:di/dt tripping 0 1 0 None 4 4
743 M:trip cable ϑ 0 1 0 None 4 4
744 M: trip cable S-W 0 1 0 None 4 4
745 M:trip cable S-E 0 1 0 None 4 4
746 M:screen breaks 0 1 0 None 4 4
747 M:measurement tr 0 1 0 None 4 4
748 M:frame fault tr 0 1 0 None 4 4
749 M:sustained s c 0 1 0 None 4 4
750 M:close troubl 0 1 0 None 4 4
751 M:opening troubl 0 1 0 None 4 4
752 M:MCB trip 0 1 0 None 4 4
753 M: CB trouble 0 1 0 None 4 4
754 M:feedb. fault 0 1 0 None 4 4
755 M:test cont. tr 0 1 0 None 4 4
756 M:truck trouble 0 1 0 None 4 4
757 M:transfer trip 0 1 0 None 4 4
758 M:blocking trans 0 1 0 None 4 4
759 M:input E16 0 1 0 None 4 4
760 M:input E17 0 1 0 None 4 4
761 M:PROFIBUS fault 0 1 0 None 4 4
780 intern: signal 0 199 53 None 8 3
781 internal: value 0 0 0 None 8 3

SITRAS DPU96 Page 194 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

0MWXSJTEVEQIXIVW WSVXIHEGGSVHMRKXSQEMRKVSYT
Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit

1. Operation 1.1 Operation 25 I thav 0 0 0 A


1. Operation 1.1 Operation 26 I max 0 0 0 A
1. Operation 1.1 Operation 28 U min 0 0 0 V
1. Operation 1.2 Operation 25 I thav 0 0 0 A
1. Operation 1.2 Operation 26 I max 0 0 0 A
1. Operation 1.2 Operation 2 U act 0 0 0 V
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 1 I act 0 0 0 A
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 2 U act 0 0 0 V
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 3 ϑcable actual 0 0 0 degrees C
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 4 _ϑcable actual 0 0 0 F
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 16 I rms 0 0 0 A
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 25 I thav 0 0 0 A
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 98 ∆I act 0 0 0 A
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 103 di/dt act 0 0 0 A/ms
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 130 Parblock curr. 0 0 0 None
ments
2. Displays 2.1 Measure- 151 Operating status 0 3 0 None
ments
2. Displays 2.2 Peak values 26 I max 0 0 0 A
2. Displays 2.2 Peak values 27 I max r 0 0 0 A
2. Displays 2.2 Peak values 28 U min 0 0 0 V
2. Displays 2.2 Peak values 29 U max 0 0 0 V
2. Displays 2.3 Power 400 Traction energy 0 0 0 KWh
2. Displays 2.3 Power 401 Energy recovery 0 0 0 KWh
2. Displays 2.3 Power 402 Feeder power 0 0 KW
2. Displays 2.3 Power 403 Power recovery 0 0 0 KW
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 5 Trip counter 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 6 Trip count.I max 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 7 Trip count.∆I 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 8 Trip count.di/dt 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 9 Trip count.temp 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 11 Trip count.UMZ 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.4 Counters 12 Operation counter 0 0 0 None
2. Displays 2.5 Breaker 13 Total current 0 0 0 KA
stressing
2. Displays 2.5 Breaker 37 Breaking current 0 0 0 A
stressing

VT39DR Page 195 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit

4. System data 4.1 Basic data 15 Time display 1 86400 1 s


4. System data 4.1 Basic data 17 Time basis I rms 1 86400 10 s
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 20 Shunt 100 16667 5000 A/mV
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 21 Voltage divider 10 1000 100 V/V
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 22 Analog output 0 19 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 23 Gain analog.out 1 32767 1 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 67 Alarm memory 0 0 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 71 Memory event 0 1 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 72 Memory mode 0 3 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 73 Sampling rate 1 10000 1 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 74 Memory end 10 750 300 ms
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 109 Temp. unit 0 1 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 140 Set time 0 23595999 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 141 Set date 1011995 31122250 1011995 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 145 Change password 0 99999999 1234 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 147 Language 0 4 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 149 Baud rate PC 0 2 1 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 169 Enable warnings 0 1 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 188 Device identifier 0 99999999 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 189 Buffer amplifier 0 2 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 404 Timebase power 1 1440 15 min
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 700 Feeder control 0 1 0 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 711 Feeder type 0 1 1 None
4. System data 4.1 Basic data 715 Test shunt 0 3500 2 A/mV
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 80 Action trip 0 1 0 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 81 Action sys.mess. 0 1 1 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 83 Trip contact 0 1 1 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 84 Trip 250V DC 0 1 1 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 85 Current direction 0 2 0 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 86 Respons.block 1 0 1 0 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 87 Respons.block 2 0 1 0 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 131 Parblock oper. 0 2 0 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 330 Reaction S-W 0 1 1 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 331 Reaction S-E 0 1 1 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 332 React.screen mon 0 1 1 None
reaction
4. System data 4.2 Protect. 333 Reaction measure 0 1 1 None

SITRAS DPU96 Page 196 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit


reaction
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 722 Input I 16 0 18 0 None
ment
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 723 Input I 17 0 18 0 None
ment
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 724 Input I 18 0 18 0 None
ment
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 725 Input I 19 0 18 0 None
ment
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 726 Input I 20 0 18 0 None
ment
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 727 Output O 5 0 13 4 None
ment
4. System data 4.3 I/O assign- 728 Output O 9 0 13 0 None
ment
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 740 Overcurrent trip 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 741 M:∆I tripping 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 742 M:di/dt tripping 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 743 M:trip cable ϑ 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 744 M: trip cable S-W 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 745 M: trip cable S-E 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 746 M:screen breaks 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 747 M:measurement tr 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 748 M:frame fault tr 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 749 M:sustained s c 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 750 M:close troubl 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 751 M:opening troubl 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 752 M:MCB trip 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 753 M: CB trouble 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 754 M:feedb. fault 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 755 M:test cont. tr 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 756 M:truck trouble 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 757 M:transfer trip 0 1 0 None
sage

VT39DR Page 197 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit

4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 758 M:blocking trans 0 1 0 None


sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 759 M:input E16 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 760 M:input E17 0 1 0 None
sage
4. System data 4.4 Group mes- 761 M:PROFIBUS fault 0 1 0 None
sage
5. Protect. func- 5.1 I max 88 I max delay 0 1000 0 ms
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.1 I max 90 I trip 500 20000 500 A
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.1 I max 91 I trip rev 500 20000 500 A
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.2 ∆I 92 ∆I trip 100 10000 100 A
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.2 ∆I 94 ∆I alarm 10 110 80 %
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.2 ∆I 95 ∆I delay 0 200 0 ms
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.2 ∆I 96 ∆I di/dt 0 400 4 A/ms
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.2 ∆I 97 ∆I di/dt durat. 0 40 20 ms
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.3 di/dt 100 di/dt trip 2 200 10 A/ms
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.3 di/dt 101 di/dt alarm 10 110 80 %
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.3 di/dt 102 di/dt duration 10 200 10 ms
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 126 UMZ:I> 100 20000 100 A
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 127 UMZ:t(I>) 0 32000 1 s
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 128 UMZ:I> rev 100 20000 100 A
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 129 UMZ:t(I> rev) 0 32000 1 s
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 134 U min: 0 3600 0 V
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 135 U min: time 0 3200 3200 s
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 136 U min:reaction 0 2 0 None
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 137 U max: 0 3600 3600 V
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 138 U max: time 0 3200 3200 s
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.4 UMZ / Umin 139 U max:reaction 0 2 0 None
tions / Umax
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 110 Cable resistance 0 10000 0 mOhm/m

SITRAS DPU96 Page 198 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit


tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 111 Therm.const.cab. 0 3000 100 K/KWsm
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 112 Time const.cab 1 1000 200 s
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 113 Ambient temp -20 100 40 degrees C
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 114 _ambient temp. -4 212 104 F
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 115 ϑcable trip 40 200 70 degrees C
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 116 _ϑcable trip 104 392 158 F
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 117 ϑcable alarm 40 150 60 degrees C
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 118 _ϑcable alarm 104 302 140 F
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 119 Hyst. cable temp. 1 50 20 degrees C
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.5 Cable temp. 120 _hyst.cable temp. 2 90 36 F
tions
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 300 Isol. cable 1 0 1 0 None
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 301 Isol. cable 2 0 1 0 None
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 302 Cable1: status 0 0 0 None
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 303 Cable2: status 0 0 0 None
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 304 Cable1:R(S-W)act 0 0 0 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 305 Cable2:R(S-W)act 0 0 0 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 306 Cable1:R(S-E)act 0 0 0 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 307 Cable2:R(S-E)act 0 0 0 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 308 Cable1:R(S-W)min 300 20000 300 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 309 Cable2:R(S-W)min 300 20000 300 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 310 Cable1:R(S-E)min 49 500 50 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 311 Cable2:R(S-E)min 49 500 50 KOhm
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 312 Cable1: meas. 0 0 0 None
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.6 Cable insu- 313 Cable2: meas. 0 0 0 None
tions lat.
5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 320 Screen monitoring 0 3 0 None
tions screen

VT39DR Page 199 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit

5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 321 Screen1 FB act -1 1023 0 None


tions screen
5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 322 Screen1 FB min 0 1023 0 None
tions screen
5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 323 Screen1 R min 500 4000 1200 KOhm
tions screen
5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 324 Screen2 R min 500 4000 1200 KOhm
tions screen
5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 325 Screen1 status 0 2 0 None
tions screen
5. Protect. func- 5.7 Cable 326 Screen2 status 0 2 0 None
tions screen
6. Control 6.1 Test method 701 Section test 0 1 0 None
6. Control 6.2 Fast test 702 Fast test 0 1 1 None
6. Control 6.2 Fast test 703 Fast test: U min 0 4000 500 V
6. Control 6.2 Fast test 704 Fast test: delay 0 10 2 s
6. Control 6.3 Times 705 Primary pause 0 9 5 s
6. Control 6.3 Times 706 Test time 10 80 20 s
6. Control 6.3 Times 707 Test pause 3 30 10 s
6. Control 6.3 Times 708 Wait time 1 10 3 s
6. Control 6.3 Times 709 Test extension 1 10 5 s
6. Control 6.3 Times 710 Test cycles 1 8 3 None
6. Control 6.4 Limits 712 U min section 1 32000 1 V
6. Control 6.4 Limits 713 R min section 1 32000 1 Ohm
6. Control 6.4 Limits 714 Test voltage 0 0 0 V
6. Control 6.4 Limits 716 R section 0 1000000000 0 Ohm
6. Control 6.4 Limits 717 I test 0 0 0 A
6. Control 6.5 Status 718 SM: sect. feeder 0 0 0 None
6. Control 6.5 Status 719 SM: test 0 0 0 None
6. Control 6.5 Status 720 SM: close feeder 0 0 0 None
6. Control 6.5 Status 721 SM: open feeder 0 0 0 None
6. Control 6.5 Status 729 Status:test time 0 0 0 s
7. PROFIBUS 7.1 PROFIBUS 500 PROFIBUS-DP 0 2 0 None
7. PROFIBUS 7.1 PROFIBUS 501 PROFIBUS-DPE 0 2 0 None
7. PROFIBUS 7.1 PROFIBUS 502 PROFIBUS: address 0 126 0 None
7. PROFIBUS 7.1 PROFIBUS 503 PROFIBUS-DP:Prof 1 48 48 None
7. PROFIBUS 7.1 PROFIBUS 504 PROFIBUS-DP:stat 0 2147483647 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 10 Trip count.reset 0 1 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 14 Max/Min delete 0 1 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 19 Total current de 0 1 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 82 Trip block 1x 0 1 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 132 Copy parblock 0 2 0 None
sioning

SITRAS DPU96 Page 200 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit

8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 144 Password 0 99999999 0 None


sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 146 Access level 0 2 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 148 Access group 0 6 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 150 Initialize 0 2 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.1 Commis- 152 Offset comp. 0 2 0 None
sioning
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 160 Input 8 to 1 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 161 Input 16 to 9 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 162 Input 24 to 17 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 163 Output 8 to 1 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 164 Output 16 to 9 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 170 Test mode 0 1 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 171 Action mode 0 1 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 550 DM: word1 15...8 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 551 DM: word1 7...0 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 552 EM: word1 15...8 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 553 EM: word1 7...0 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 554 EM: word2 15...8 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 555 EM: word2 7...0 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 556 SB: word1 15...8 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 557 SB: word1 7...0 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 558 AB: word1 15...8 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.2 I/O test 559 AB: word1 7...0 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 70 Tripping test 0 1 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 158 Options 0 2147483647 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 159 Options input 0 2147483647 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 165 Fault filter 1 0 999 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 166 Fault filter 2 0 999 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 167 Fault filter 3 0 999 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 168 Fault filter 4 0 999 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 180 Software vers V1 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 181 Software vers V2 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 182 Software vers V3 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 183 SW vers. day 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 184 SW vers. month 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 185 SW vers. year 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 186 Parameter vers.1 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 187 Parameter vers.2 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 190 Memory address 0 1215752191 524288 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 191 Memory date 0 65535 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 334 Int:mode measure 0 3 0 None

VT39DR Page 201 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Parameters

Main group Subgroup No. Name Minimum Maximum Default Unit

8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 520 Int:comm.board 0 100000 0 None


8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 521 Int:comm.DP_SW 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 522 Int:comm. version 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 523 Int:comm.livesig 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 780 Intern: signal 0 199 53 None
8. Diagnosis 8.3 Service 781 Intern: value 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 30 Analysis start 0 8191 0 ms
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 31 Analysis time -1 8192 0 ms
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 32 Analysis Imax 0 0 0 A
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 33 Analysis ∆I 0 0 0 A
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 34 Analysis di/dt 0 0 0 A/ms
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 35 Analy.time ∆I 0 0 0 ms
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 36 Analy.time di/dt 0 0 0 ms
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 40 Event index 0 999 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 41 Event type 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 42 Event value 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 43 Event date 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 44 Event time 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 45 Event status 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 46 Event type 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 50 Warn index 0 255 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 51 Warn type 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 52 Warn value 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 53 Warn date 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 54 Warn time 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 60 Filter time event 0 2 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 61 Filter type event 0 999 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 62 Event memory 0 0 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 65 Filter time warn 0 2 0 None
8. Diagnosis 8.4 Analysis 66 Filter type warn 0 999 0 None

SITRAS DPU96 Page 202 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Messages

12 List of Messages
Cause:
System messages Sys
Switching action messages Sw
Tripping messages Trp
Warning messages Warn
Message Cause Explanation
Failure, optical Sys * Failure of link for optical fibre cable messages from buffer amplifier
fibre cable
Tripping test Trp Tripping test activated
BS overrun Sys * Computation time overrun in operations system
Note: Inform Service Dept.
C fault Sys * Capacitor charge not reached in the time of 6 s
Note: Supply voltage too low, no trip coil connected or unit defective.
C charging phase Warn Trip cause was present, capacitor charge was not adequate.
Note: 2 trips within 6 s or with capacitor fault in conjunction with message “C fault”.
C charge ok Sys Capacitors successfully charged.
DC CB off Sw Checkback signal that DC breaker is switched off
DC CB on Sw Checkback signal that DC breaker is switched on
∆I Trp Trip message ∆I
di/dt Trp Trip message di/dt
EE Init Pg0 Sys * Error on reading Parameter Memory 0 from the EPROM
Note: Inform Service Dept. if this occurs in combination with “EE Init Pg1“.
EE Init Pg1 Sys * Error on reading Parameter Memory 1 from the EPROM
Note: Inform Service Dept. if this occurs in combination with “EE Init Pg0“.
EE Page copy Sys * Inconsistency on comparing EPROM values. Note: Check parameterisation!
Fault EE-PG0 Sys * EPROM memory 0 defective Note: Inform Service Dept.
Fault EE-PG1 Sys * EPROM memory 1 defective Note: Inform Service Dept.
EE Updt Pg0 Sys * Only occurs if new EPROM with new parameter structure has been detected.
EE Updt Pg1 Sys * Only occurs if new EPROM with new parameter structure has been detected.
Input reset Sys Entered value not yet accepted with Enter key.
Enable tripping Sw Trip blocking was deactivated [P82]
G-ID present Warn An attempt was made to overwrite the device identifier.
I2C EE access Sys * No communications possible with memory.
Note: Inform Service Dept.
Imax Trp Trip message Imax
Cable temp. Trp Trip message, cable temperature
Optical fibre cable Warn Optical fibre cable message received before previous one has been processed.
Oscill. locked Warn The value for the sampling rate [P73] is too low in the memory mode “Oscilloscope”.
Param.block Sw Parameter block changeover executed.
Parbl. copy Sw Parameter blocks have been copied.
Password missing Warn The password has not been entered/confirmed on changing the access level.

VT39DR Page 203 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Messages

Message Cause Explanation


Powerfail Sys System without voltage
Buffer RAM Sys * Error in buffered memory occurred.
Device has been a long time without voltage; measurement curves, historical memory
and last parameter number may be lost.
Buffer time Sys * Time buffer run down (compare with buffer RAM)
RAM test error Sys * Error detection on memory test
Note: Inform Service Dept.
Return optical fibre Sys Link established for optical fibre message from buffer amplifier.
cable
Protection active Sw Unit protective function activated.
Shunt failure Sys * Connection broken Buffer amplifier / Shunt
Shunt recovery Sw Connection restored Buffer amplifier / Shunt
Tripping lock-out Sw Tripping lockout activated [P82]
System start Sys System start record after unit warm-up
Test on Sw Test mode switched on
Test off Sw Test mode switched off
Timeout receiving Warn Communications error on reception at protective unit from PC (link is being re-
established)
Timeout sending Warn Communications error on sending from protective unit to PC (link is being re-
established)
Trace stop Trp Recording of measurement memory due to operation “Memory mode stop” [P72]
Bootstrapping Sw Device has been initialised
Watchdog Sys * Internal watchdog detected.
Counter = 0 Sw Trip counter has been cleared
Temperature input Warn Illogical temperature input
Event acknowl. Sw Illogical temperature input
Warning acknowl. Sw Record in event memory acknowledged.
Par. Struct. del Sw Record in alarm memory acknowledged.
Wrong option Warn Option code was incorrect
Option ok Warn Option code was correct, option enabled
+
Read-back output Sys Diagnostic fault on Outputs A12, A14, A16
+
I trip AUT Sys Breaker trip (e.g. static trip)
+
MCB trip AUT Sys MCB trip
+
Unsucc. switch-on Sys Unsuccessful switch-on
AUT
+
Frame fault AUT Sys Frame fault

+
CBK CB AUT Sys Checkback fault on circuit breaker
+
CBK test cont. AUT Sys Checkback fault on test contactor
+
Truck AUT Sys Truck position fault
+
Sust. short Sys Sustained short circuit
I trip ok Sw Fault rectified: Breaker trip
MCB ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: MCB trip
Unsuccess.ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: Unsuccessful switch-on
Frame ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: Frame fault
CB ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: Checkback signals, CB

SITRAS DPU96 Page 204 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Messages

Message Cause Explanation


Test cont. ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: Checkback signals, test contact
Truck ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: Checkback signals, truck position
Section ok AUT Sw Fault rectified: Checkback of section test successful
Profibus Init F Sys * Error on initialisation of Profibus board
+
Profibus oper. F Sys Error in operation of Profibus board
Cable 1 break Trp Life-sign of Cable Monitor Module 1 failed
Cable 2 break Trp Life-sign of Cable Monitor Module 2 failed
+
Cable 1 calc. Sys Error on calculation of Insulation Monitor 1
+
Cable 2 calc. Sys Error on calculation of Insulation Monitor 2
Cable 1 R(S-W)F Trp Fault screen-wire resistance Cable 1
Cable 2 R(S-W)F Trp Fault screen-wire resistance Cable 2
Cable 1 R(S-E)F Trp Fault screen-earth resistance Cable 1
Cable 2 R(S-E)F Trp Fault screen-earth resistance Cable 2
Profibus board F Sys * Fault message, Profibus board
Profibus operation Warn PROFIBUS in operation, change not effective
Profibus comm. F Sys * Communication error on establishing or removing link
+
Profibus link F Sys Connection fault message
Screen 1 fault Trp Screen breakage fault for Cable 1
Screen 2 fault Trp Screen breakage fault for Cable 2
Cable 1 meas. Trp Sustained measurement fault on Cable Monitor Module 1
error
Cable 2 meas. Trp Sustained measurement fault on Cable Monitor Module 2
error
Cable 1 connection Sys * Faulty connection on CH1
Cable 2 connection Sys * Faulty connection on CH2
Breaker ON Sw Breaker has been switched on
Breaker OFF Sw Breaker has been switched off
Test pos. Sw Section test positive
Test neg. Sw Section test negative
+
AUT intertrip. Sys Switch-off due to intertripping
+
AUT blocking Sys Switch-off due to blocking substation
Imax r Trp Trip due to Imax rev
UMZ: I> Trp Trip UMZ protection, feeder direction
UMZ: I>r Trp Trip UMZ protection, reverse recovery direction
Umin Trp Trip due to Umin
Umax Trp Trip due to Umax
+
Unsuccess. OFF Sys Error on switching off CB
+
I 16 active Sys Input E16 active and in group message
+
I 17 active Sys Input E17 active and in group message

The system messages labelled with * result in the “System ready” signal on Output A6 (-X2:34)
+
giving a 0 signal while this message is present. The messages labelled with can be parameterize
on the group alarm A1 X2:29.

VT39DR Page 205 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of Messages

SITRAS DPU96 Page 206 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Abbreviations

13 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Explanation
AB General command (1-bit command)
AC Alternating current
AP Access level (access protection)
AUT Message from automation system
BA Buffer amplifier
CB Circuit breaker
CBK Checkback signal
CI Cable insulation
CNTR-N Control signal from repeater (direction control)
CNTR-P Control signal for repeater (direction control)
CTS Clear to send
DC Direct current
DGND Data transfer potential (ground 5V)
DI Digital input
DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung (German Industrial Standards)
DM Double messages (2-bit information)
DPU Digital processor unit
DQS Deutsche Gesellschaft zu Zertifizierung von Managementsystemen mbH
(German Company for Certification of Management Systems)
EM Single messages (1-bit information)
EN European Standard
EP Setting parameter
FB Feedback
FSMA Optical fibre connector, screw-type
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
ISO International Organization for Standardization
LWL Optical fibre cable
PU Processor unit
RTS Request to Send
RXD Receive Data
SB Switching command (2-bit command)
SITRAS Siemens Traction Power Supply
TXD Transmit Data
UMZ Definite-time overcurrent-time protection
UW Substation
VD Voltage divider
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (German Electrical Engineering Association)

VT39DR Page 207 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
SITRAS DPU96 Page 208 of 214 VT39DR
DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
List of figures

14 List of figures
Fig. 1: System configuration..................... 16 Fig. 31 Operating principle for the ∆I trip. .. 84
Fig. 2: Overview of the digital protective unit Fig. 32: Principle of the di/dt trip.................. 86
and controller................................. 25 Fig. 33: UMZ .............................................. 87
Fig. 3: Dimension drawing for the digital Fig. 34: Umin ................................................. 88
protective unit. .............................. 26 Fig. 35: Umax ................................................ 89
Fig. 4: Block diagram – central unit........... 27 Fig. 36: Temperature trace ......................... 90
Fig. 5 Capacitor trip ................................. 34 Fig. 37 Thermal cable model ..................... 91
Fig. 6 Dimension drawing – DC buffer Fig. 38 Reading the input information...... 103
amplifier ........................................ 35 Fig. 39: Principle of analysis of the current
Fig. 7 Dimension drawing – DC buffer trace I .......................................... 110
amplifier ........................................ 37 Fig. 40: Principle of analysing the current
Fig. 8 Dimension drawing for voltage trace I .......................................... 112
divider module............................... 40 Fig. 41: Principle of analysing the current
Fig. 9 Block diagram for DC buffer amplifier trace II.......................................... 113
and voltage divider module............ 42 Fig. 42: Selection criteria for SITRAS DPU96
Fig. 10 Dimension drawing – cable monitor PU options. .................................. 127
module .......................................... 44 Fig. 43: SITRAS 8MF94, truck in
Fig 11: Block diagram of buffer amplifier with disconnected / test position. ........ 129
voltage divider module and cable Fig. 44: SITRAS 8MF94 low voltage
monitor module (cable monitoring compartment ............................... 130
without screen interruption)........... 46 Fig. 45: Sequence for no short circuits ..... 136
Fig. 12: Circuit with a termination resistance.47 Fig. 46: Sequence for a temporary short
Fig. 13: Circuit with an even number of circuit........................................... 137
parallel cables without termination Fig. 47: Sequence for sustained short circuit138
resistance. ..................................... 47 Fig. 48: Block diagram of the system
Fig. 14: Membrane keypad and LCD display51 monitoring ................................... 140
Fig. 15: Window parameters ...................... 52 Fig. 49: Automation system ..................... 141
Fig. 16: Diagram of main groups and Fig. 50: Operation window: 1.5 Section.... 142
subgroups ..................................... 52 Fig. 51: Network closure .......................... 143
Fig. 17: Window parameters ...................... 55 Fig. 52: Monitoring in the Off state........... 144
Fig 18: Change parameter number ............ 56 Fig. 53: Check .......................................... 146
Fig. 19: Function of the two parameter blocks Fig. 54: Testing......................................... 147
for the protection parameters ........ 57 Fig. 55: Test sequence ............................. 148
Fig. 20: Window Action .............................. 57 Fig. 56: Sustained short circuit. ................ 150
Fig. 21: Principle of the event memory....... 58 Fig. 57: Switch-on..................................... 151
Fig. 22: Principle of the alarm memory....... 59 Fig. 58: Switch-on procedure.................... 152
Fig. 23: Principle of the measurement Fig. 59: On ............................................... 154
memory......................................... 60 Fig. 60: Unsuccessful attempt at switch-on155
Fig. 24: Operating principle of the memory Fig. 61: Switch-off .................................... 156
modes Normal and Hold ................ 62 Fig. 62: Blocking ....................................... 157
Fig. 25: Operating principle of the memory Fig. 63: Feeder cable cross-section .......... 162
modes Stop and Oscilloscope ....... 63 Fig. 64: Equivalent circuit of feeder cable . 162
Fig. 26: Operation window ......................... 64 Fig. 65: Cable measurement method ....... 163
Fig. 27: Events window.............................. 67 Fig. 66: Cable screen monitoring .............. 163
Fig. 28: Trip window................................... 67 Fig. 67: Block diagram .............................. 164
Fig. 29: Warning window ........................... 68
Fig. 30: Trip Imax ........................................... 82

VT39DR Page 209 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
SITRAS DPU96 Page 210 of 214 VT39DR
DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Index

15 Index
[001] I act ...................................................66 [054] Warn time .......................................115
[002] U act..................................................66 [060] Filter time event ..............................116
[003] ϑcable actual .....................................66 [061] Filter type event ..............................116
[004] _ϑcable actual ...................................66 [062] Event memory.................................116
[005] Trip counter .......................................67 [065] Filter time warn ...............................116
[006] Trip count. Imax.................................67 [066] Filter type warn ...............................116
[007] Trip count. ∆I .....................................67 [067] Alarm memory.................................116
[008] Trip count. di/dt .................................67 [070] Tripping test ............................ 108, 174
[009] Trip count. temp ................................67 [071] Memory event...................................61
[010] Trip count reset ...............................102 [072] Memory mode.............................61, 72
[011] Trip count. UMZ ................................67 [073] Sampling rate ..............................62, 72
[012] Operation counter .............................67 [074] Memory end................................62, 72
[013] Total current ....................................172 [080] Action Trip .........................................74
[014] Max/min delete ...............................102 [081] Action sys.mess ................................74
[015] Time display ......................................70 [082] Trip block 1x ....................................102
[016] I rms..................................................66 [083] Trip contact .......................................75
[017] Time basis I rms ................................70 [084] Trip 250 V DC ....................................75
[019] Total current de ....................... 102, 172 [085] Current direction................................75
[020] Shunt...........................................50, 70 [086] Respons block 1 ................................76
[021] Voltage divider.............................50, 71 [087] Respons block 2 ................................76
[022] Analog Output ...................................71 [088] I max delay ........................................83
[023] Gain analog out..................................72 [090] I trip...................................................83
[025] I thav .................................................66 [091] I trip rev .............................................83
[026] I max .................................................66 [092] ∆I trip.................................................84
[027] I max r ...............................................66 [094] ∆I alarm .............................................84
[028] U min ................................................66 [095] ∆I delay..............................................84
[029] U max................................................66 [096] ∆I di/dt ...............................................84
[030] Analysis start ...................................113 [097] ∆I di/dt durat......................................85
[031] Analysis time ...................................114 [098] ∆I act .................................................66
[032] Analysis I max .................................114 [100] di/dt trip.............................................86
[033] Analysis ∆I .......................................114 [101] di/dt Warnung....................................86
[034] Analysis di/dt ...................................114 [102] di/dt duration .....................................86
[035] Analysis time ∆I ...............................114 [103] di/dt act .............................................66
[036] Analy. time di/dt ..............................114 [109] Temp. unit ...................................72, 92
[037] Breaking current ..............................172 [110] Cable resistance ................................92
[040] Event index .....................................115 [111] Therm. const. cab..............................92
[041] Event type .......................................115 [112] Time const. cable ..............................93
[042] Event value......................................115 [113] Ambient temp. ..................................93
[043] Event date .......................................115 [114] _ambient temp. .................................92
[044] Event time.......................................115 [115] ϑ cable trip ........................................93
[045] Action status ...................................113 [116] _ϑ cable trip.......................................92
[046] Action type ......................................113 [117] ϑ cable alarm.....................................93
[050] Warn index ......................................115 [118] _ϑ cable alarm ...................................92
[051] Warn type........................................115 [119] Hyst. cable temp. ..............................92
[052] Warn value ......................................115 [120] _hyst. cable temp. .............................92
[053] Warn date........................................115 [126] UMZ I>..............................................88

VT39DR Page 211 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
[127] UMZ t(I>)...........................................88 [303] Cable 2 status ........................... 94, 168
[128] UMZ I> rev ........................................88 [304] Cable 1 R(S-W)act ..................... 94, 168
[129] UMZ t(I> rev).....................................88 [305] Cable 2 R(S-W)act ..................... 94, 168
[130] Parblock curr ...............................58, 66 [306] Cable 1 R(S-E)act....................... 94, 169
[131] Parblock oper. .............................58, 76 [307] Cable 1 R(S-E)act....................... 95, 169
[132] Copy parblock............................ 58, 102 [308] Cable 1 R(S-W)min .............. 51, 95, 169
[134] U min ................................................89 [309] Cable 2 R(S-W)min .................... 95, 169
[135] U min time ........................................89 [310] Cable 1 R(S-E)min...................... 95, 169
[136] U min reaction ...................................89 [311] Cable 2 R(S-E)min...................... 95, 169
[137] U max................................................91 [312] Cable 1 meas ...................... 51, 95, 169
[138] U max time........................................91 [313] Cable 2 meas ............................ 95, 169
[139] U max reaction ..................................91 [320] Screen mon. ........................ 51, 96, 170
[140] Set time.............................................70 [321] Screen 1 FB act ......................... 96, 170
[141] Set date.............................................70 [322] Screen 1 FB min........................ 96, 170
[144] Password ........................................102 [323] Screen 1 R min.......................... 96, 170
[145] Change password..............................72 [324] Screen 2 R min.......................... 96, 170
[146] Access level ....................................103 [325] Screen 1 status ......................... 96, 170
[147] Language...........................................73 [326] Screen 2 status ......................... 96, 170
[148] Access group ..................................103 [330] Reaction S-W ............................ 76, 167
[149] Baud rate PC .....................................73 [331] Reaction S-E.............................. 76, 167
[150] Initialize ..................................... 49, 103 [332] React. screen mon .................... 76, 167
[151] Operating status..........................59, 66 [333] Reaction measure ..................... 76, 167
[152] Offset comp. ............................. 50, 103 [400] Traction energy.......................... 67, 171
[158] Options ...........................................108 [401] Energy recovery ........................ 67, 171
[159] Options input...................................108 [402] Feeder power............................ 67, 171
[160] Input 8-1 ..........................................104 [403] Power recovery ......................... 67, 171
[161] Input 16-9 ........................................105 [404] Timebase power........................ 73, 171
[162] Input 24-17 ......................................105 [500] PROFIBUS-DP ......................... 100, 119
[163] Output 8-1 .......................................105 [501] PROFIBUS-DPE....................... 100, 119
[164] Output 16-9 .....................................105 [502] PROFIBUS address ................. 100, 119
[165] Fault filter 1 .....................................108 [503] PROFIBUS-DP Prof ................. 100, 119
[166] Fault filter 2 .....................................108 [504] PROFIBUS-DP Stat.................. 100, 119
[167] Fault filter 3 .....................................108 [520] Int comm.board ....................... 109, 121
[168] Fault filter 4 .....................................108 [521] int Komm.DP-SW .................... 110, 122
[169] Enable warnings ................................73 [522] Int comm.version..................... 110, 122
[170] Test mode .......................................105 [523] Int comm.livesig ...................... 111, 122
[171] Action mode....................................106 [550] DM Word1 15...8.............................106
[180] Software vers V1.............................109 [551] DM Word1 7...0...............................106
[181] Software vers V2.............................109 [552] EM Word1 15...8 .............................106
[182] Software vers V3.............................109 [553] EM Word1 7...0 ...............................106
[183] Software vers day ...........................109 [554] EM Word2 15...8 .............................106
[184] Software vers month.......................109 [555] EM Word2 7...0 ...............................106
[185] Software vers year ..........................109 [556] SB Word1 15...8 ..............................106
st
[186] Parameter Version 1 place .............109 [557] SB Word1 7...0................................106
nd
[187] Parameter Version 2 place.............109 [558] AB Word1 15...8..............................106
[188] Device identifier ................................73 [559] AB Word1 7...0................................107
[190] Memory address .............................109 [700] Section control ..................................73
[191] Memory date...................................109 [701] Section test .....................................163
[300] Isol. cable 1 ............................... 94, 168 [701] Section test ............................... 96, 134
[301] Isol. cable 2 ............................... 94, 168 [702] Fast test .................................... 97, 134
[302] Cable 1 status ........................... 94, 168 [703] Fast test U min..................................97

SITRAS DPU96 Page 212 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Index

[703] Fast test U min........................ 134, 169 2.3 Power........................................... 67, 171
[704] Fast test delay........................... 97, 135 2.4 Counters ..............................................67
[705] Primary pause ........................... 97, 135 2.5 Switch load................................... 67, 172
[706] Test time ................................... 98, 135 3.1 History..................................................68
[707] Test pause................................. 98, 135 3.2 Trip.......................................................68
[708] Wait time................................... 98, 135 3.3 System ind. ..........................................68
[709] Test extension........................... 98, 135 3.4 Switching op. .......................................68
[710] Test cycles ................................ 98, 135 3.5 Warning................................................69
[711] Feeder type .......................................73 4.1 Basic data.............................................69
[712] U min section .................... 98, 136, 163 4.2 Protective reaction ...............................74
[713] R min section .................... 98, 136, 163 4.3 I/O assignment ..................... 76, 122, 160
[714] Test voltage....................... 98, 136, 163 4.4 Group message....................................78
[715] Test shunt ........................... 50, 73, 163 5.1 I max ....................................................82
[716] R section ........................... 98, 136, 163 5.2 ∆I..........................................................83
[717] I test .................................. 98, 136, 163 5.3 di/dt ......................................................86
[718] SM sect. feeder......................... 99, 136 5.4 UMZ/Umin/Umax .................................88
[719] SM test ..................................... 99, 137 5.5 Cable temp...........................................91
[720] SM close feeder ........................ 99, 137 5.6 Cable insulat................................. 93, 168
[721] SM open feeder ........................ 99, 137 5.7 Cable screen ................................ 95, 170
[729] Status test time......................... 99, 137 6.1 Test method................................. 96, 134
[740] Overcurrent trip .................................79 6.2 Fast test ....................................... 97, 134
[741] M ∆I tripping......................................79 6.3 Times ...................................................97
[742] M di/dt tripping..................................79 6.3 Times .................................................135
[743] M trip cable ϑ ....................................80 6.4 Limits ...................................................98
[744] M trip cable S-W................................80 6.4 Limits .................................................135
[745] M trip cable S-E .................................80 6.5 Status...................................................99
[746] M screen breaks................................80 6.5 Status.................................................136
[747] M measurement trip..........................80 7.1 PROFIBUS..........................................100
[748] M frame fault trip ..............................80 8.1 Start up ..............................................102
[749] M Sustained s c.................................80 8.2 I/O test ...............................................104
[750] M close trouble .................................80 8.3 Service ....................................... 107, 121
[751] M opening trouble .............................80 8.4 Analysis..............................................112
[752] M MCB tripped .................................80 Action window ...........................................59
[753] M CB tro............................................81 Alarm memory ................................... 59, 115
[754] M feedb. fault....................................81 analyse the measurement memory ..........112
[755] M Test cont. tr...................................81 Automation ..............................................143
[756] M truck trouble..................................81 bipolar ........................................................75
[757] M transfer trip ...................................81 Breaker stressing .....................................172
[758] M blocking trans................................81 Breaker tripping........................................176
[759] M input E16.......................................81 capacitor trip ..............................................35
[760] M input E17.......................................81 Checks on receipt ......................................21
[761] M PROFIBUS fault ............................81 Communications interface..........................28
[780] Intern signal.....................................111 Control .......................................................53
[781] Internal value ...................................111 Current slop ...............................................82
1.1 Operation .............................................65 Current step change ∆I...............................82
1.2 Operation .............................................65 cursor keys.................................................54
1.3 Operation .............................................65 delay period................................................84
1.4 Operation .............................................65 delay period................................................84
1.5 Feeder..................................................65 Diagnosis ...................................................53
2.1 Measurements .....................................66 Displays......................................................53
2.2 Peak values ..........................................66 Evaluation.................................................116

VT39DR Page 213 of 214 SITRAS DPU96


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc
Event code .................................................60 Optical fibre cable ....................................176
Event date............................................60, 68 Options ....................................................128
Event memory........................ 53, 59, 68, 115 Outputs......................................................31
Event time............................................60, 68 Packing.......................................................21
Event value ..........................................60, 68 PC Application Software.............................56
Expert ........................................................56 PC link ......................................................176
I act ............................................................65 positive ......................................................75
I max ..........................................................65 Process interface .......................................29
I thav ..........................................................65 Profibus......................................................53
Inputs .........................................................33 Profibus interface .......................................28
Interface connector X1 ...............................27 Protective functions ...................................53
Interface connector X2 ...............................29 RAM test..................................................175
Interface connector X3 ...............................28 Screen monitoring ......................................48
Interface connector X4 ...............................28 Screen monitoring and breakage ..............165
Interface connector X5 ...............................28 Self-test....................................................175
Interface connector X6 ...............................28 Shunt connection .....................................176
internal watchdog.....................................176 Standard.....................................................56
Intertripping function ................................161 Storage.......................................................21
main groups ...............................................52 subgroups ..................................................52
maximum current .......................................82 Supply interface .........................................27
Measurement memory ........................59, 61 System data ...............................................53
monitoring functions ................................175 system protection ......................................15
NC contact .................................................75 temperature protection trip ........................91
negative .....................................................75 Time synchronisation ...............................128
NO contact.................................................75 Transport conditions...................................21
NOTE ............................... 24, 49, 50, 51, 103 U min .........................................................65
Observe .....................................................56 Warning code .............................................60
Operating states.........................................59 Warning date........................................60, 69
operating voltage collapses ......................176 Warning time..............................................60
Operation ........................................... 53, 176 ∆I monitoring..............................................85
Operation window......................................65

SITRAS DPU96 Page 214 of 214 VT39DR


DPU96_BA_A3_E.doc

S-ar putea să vă placă și